Ebcs 2 Structural Use of Concrete PDF

-,
-.~~. i .EBCS-2
.
I
r;y
Ed'\iopian Building Code Standard
-
STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.
~
!
.,
!
!
I
i
\
..
I
\
.1. Wnistry of Works &, Urban Development
j Addis Ababa., Ethiopia. 4
~ 1995
[1
.
I
I
,
':1~
EBCS-2 '.
structural use of concrete
Technical Committee Members
Negussie Tebedge (Secretary)
Asrat Tessema
Bekele Mekonnen
Mikyas Abayneh
Shifferaw Taye
Editors
ACME Designers & Consultants
Addis Ababa
.\
I
j
I
~
~ 1
'f'..J:",
j
j
.
;\:~1. FOREWORD '
'"
The Proclamation to defme the powers and duties of the Central and Regional Executive
Org~s of the Transitional Government of Ethiopia No. 41/1993 empowers the Ministry of Works
and Urban Development to prepare the Country's Building Code, issue Standards for design and
.construction works, and follow up and supervise the implementation of same.
,In exercise of these powers and in discharge of its responsibility, the Ministry is issuing a
series of Building Code Standards of general application.
The purpose of these standards is to serve as nationally recognized documents, the
application of which is deemed to ensure compliance of buildings with the minimum requirements
for design, construction and quality of materials set down by the National Building Code.
The major benefits to be gained in applying these standards are the harmonization of
professional practice and the ensuring of appropriate levels of safety, health and economy with due
consideration of the objective conditions and needs of the country.
As these standards are technical documents which, by their very nature, require periodic
updating, revised editions will be issued by the Ministry from time to time as appropriate.
.
The Ministry welcomes comments and suggestions on all aspect of the Ethiopian Building
-Code Standards. All feedback received will be carefully reviewed by professional experts in the
field of building construction with a view to possible incorporation of amendments in future
editions.
Haile Assegidie
Minister
Ministry of Works and
Urban Development
1995
T ABLE OF CONTENTS
.
CHAPTER 1 -GENERAL 1
1
1.1 SCOPE 1
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE WORKS 1
'1.3 UNITS 1
1.4 NOTATIONS 2
CHAPrER 2 -DATA ON-CONCRETE AND SrEEL 9
2,1 GENERAL 9
2.2 GRADES OF CONCRETE 9
2.~ CHARACTERISTIC COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE 9
2.4 CHARACTERISTIC TENSILE STRENGTH 10
2.5 DEFQRMATION PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE 10
2.5.1 Stress-Strain Diagrams 11
2.5.2 Modulus of Elasticity 11
2.5'.3 Poisson's Ratio 11
2.5.4 Creep and Shrinkage 11
2.5.5 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion 12
2.6 CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
2.7 CLASSIFICATION AND GEOMETRY OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
2.8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF REINFORCING STEEL 13
~ 2.9 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF REINFORCING STEEL 14
2.9.1 Strength 14
~ 2.9.2 Ductility 14
2.9.3 Stress-Strain Diagram 14
2.9.4 Modulus of Elasticity 14
2.9.5 Fatigtle 14
2.10 TECHNOLOGICAL PROPERTIES 14
2.10.1 Bond and Anchorage 14
2.10.2 Weldability 15
CHAPfER 3 -BASIS OF D~GN 17
17
3.1 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 17
3.2 LIMIT STATES 17
3.2.1 General 17
3.2.2 Ultimate Limit States 18
3.2.3 Serviceability Limit States 18
3.3 DESIGN SITUATIONS 18
3.4 ACTIONS 18
3.4.1 Definitions and Principal Classification 18
3.4.2 Representative Values of Actions 19
.3.4.3 Representative Values of Permanent Actions 19
3.4.4 Representative Values of Variable Actions 20
EBCS 2 -1995 vii
.
3.4.5 Representative Values of Accidental Actions 20
3.4.6 Design Values of Actions 20 ~
3.4.4 Design Values of the Effects of Actions 21
3.5 MATERIALS 21
3.5.1 Characteristic Strength 21
3.5.2 Design Strength 21
3.5.3 Partial Safety Factors for Materials 22
, 3.5.3.1 Ultimate limit State 22
3.5.3.2 Serviceability Limit States 22
,3.5.4 Design Strength for Concrete 22
3.5.5 Design Strength for Steel 22
3.6 COMBINATION OF ACTIONS 23
3.6.1 Ultimate Limit States 23
3.7 ANALYSIS OF LINE ELEMENTS 24
3.7.1 Methods of Analysis 24
3.7.2 Load Arrangements and Load Cases 24
3.7.3 Imperfections 24
3.7.4 Time Dependent Effects 25
3.7.5 Idealization of the Structure 25
3.7.6 Stiffness 26
3.7.7 Effective Span Length 26
3.7.8 Effective Flange Width for T -Beams and L-Beams 26
3.7.9 Redistribution of Moments 26i
3.7.10 Second-Order Effects 27
j 3.8 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF PLANE ELEMENTS 27 .
\ 3.8.1 Slabs 27
~ 3.8.1.1 Methods of Analysis 27 ..
j 3.8.1.2 Linear Analysis, with or without Redistribution 27
.3.8.1.3 Plastic Analysis 27
f 3.8.2 Flat Slabs 28
j 3.8.2.1 Definition 28
3.8.2.2 Method of Analysis 28
CHAPI'ER 4 .ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES 29
4.1 SCOPE 29
4.2 BASIS OF DESIGN 29
4.2.1 Analysis of Sections ~ 29
4.2.2 Strain Distribution 29
4.2.3 Idealized Stress-Strain Diagram for Concrete 29
4.2.3.1 Parabolic-Rectangular Diagram 29
4.2.3.2 Rectanglar Diagram 29
4.2.4 Stress-Strain Diagram for Steel 31
4.3 FLEXURAL MEMBERS .31
4.3.1 General 31
4.3.2 Distance Between Lateral Supports of Flexural Members 31 ~
4.4 COMPRESSION MEMBERS 31
4.4.1 Scope and Definition 31
4.4.2 Anal)Jis and Design Procedures 32
); :'~
;
viii EBCS 2 .1995 '"
4.4.3 Allowance for Imperfections 32
~ 4.4.4 Classification of Structures and Structural Elements 33
4.4.4.1 General 33
4.4.4.2 SYvay or !Von-S~ Stnuctures 33
4.4.4.3 Braced or Unbraced Stnuctures 34
4.4.4.4 Isolated Columns 34
4.4.5 Definition of Slenderness Ratio 34
4.4.6 Limits of Slenderness 35
4.4.7 EffeCtive Buckling Length of Compression Members 35
4.4.8 Frame stability 37
4.4.8.1 General 37
4.4.8.2 Analysis of Sway Frames 37
4.4.9 Design of Non-Sway Frames 37
4.4.10 Design of Isolated Columns 38
4.4.10.1 General 38
4.4.10.2 Total Eccentricity 38
4.4.10.3 Second-Order Eccentricity 38
4.4.11 Amplified Sway Moments Method for Sway Frames 39
4.4.12 Determination of Story Buckling Load !Vcr 40
4.4.13 Effect of Creep 41
4.4.14 Slender Columns Bent About the Major Axis 42
4.4.15 Biaxial Bending of Columns 42
4.4.15.1 Small Ratios of Relative Eccentricity 42
4.4.15.2 Overlapping Buckling Curves 42
4.4.15.3 Approximate Method 42
4.5 SHEAR 43
.4.5.1 General 43
4.5.2 Limiting Value of Ultimate Shear Force 43
4.5.3 Shear Resistance of Concrete in Beams and Slabs 44
4.5.3.1 Members Without Signlflcant Axial Forces 44
4.5.3.2 Members Subjected to Signlflcant Axial Compression 44
4.5.3.3 Members Subjected to Axial Tension 44
4.5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement 45
4.5.5 Web-Flanie Connections 45
4.5.5.1 General 45
4.5.5.2 Resistance to Inclined Compression 46
4.5.5.3 Resistance to Diagonal Tension 46
4.6 TORSION 47
4.6.1 Definitions 47
4.6.2 General 47
4.6.3 Limitini Value of Ultimate Torque 48
4.6.4 Torsional Resistance of Concrete 48
4.6.5 Deaiin of Torsional Reinforcement 48
4.6.6 Combined Action-Effects 49
4.6.6.1 Torsion and Bending and/or Longitudinal S!resses 49
.4.6.6.2 Torsion and Shear 49
:.
..ESCS " .1995 Ix
., c..-~~ 4.7 PUNCHING SO
4.7.1 General SO
4.7.2 Loaded Area 50 .
4.7.3 Critical Section 50
4.7.3.1 ~Area Remotefrom an Opening ora Free Edge 51
4.7.3.2 Loaded Area Qose to an Opening 51
4.7.3.3 Loaded Area Qose to Free Edge 51
4.7.4 Applied Load Effect 52
, 4.7.5 Moment Transfer Between Slabs and Columns 53
4.7.6 Resistance of Slabs or Footings Without Punching Shear Reinforcement 53
4.7.7 Resistance of Slabs or Footings with Punching Shear Reinforcement 53
CHAFfER 5' -SERVICEABILITY LIMIT ~A~ SS
5.1 SCOPE 55
5.2 LIMIT STATE OF DEFLECTION 55
5.2.1 General 55
5.2.2 Limits on Deflection 55
5.2.3 Requirements for Effective Depth 55
5.2.4 Calculation of Deflections 56
5.2.4.1 Immediate Deflections 56
5.2.4.2 Long Term Deflections 57
5.3 LIMIT STATES OF CRACKING 57
5.3.1 General 57
5.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement Areas 57
5.3.3 Limit State of Crack Formation S9 -
5.3.4 Limit State of Crack Widths 59
5.3.4.1 General 59
5.3.4.2 Cracks due to Flexure 59 .
5.3.4.3 Cracking due to Shear 62
CHAPrER 6 -SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS 63
, 6.1 SCOPE 63
~ 6.2 WALLS 63
1 6.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Walls 63
~ 6.2.1.1 Design of Reinforced Concrete Walls for Flexure and Axial Loads 63
~ 6.2.1.2 Shear Resistance of Reinforced Walls 64
4 6.2.2 Plain Concrete Walls -:..!(. 64
~ 6.2.2.1 Design of Plain Concrete Walls for Flexure and Axial Loads 65
6.2.2.2 Shear Resistance of Plain Walls 65
6.3 DEEP BEAMS 66
6.3.1 General 66
6.3.2 Design for Shear 66
6.3.2.1 Definitions and Limitation 66
6.3.2.2 Shear Strength of Deep Shear Spans 67
6.3.2.3 Shear Carried by Deep Shear Spans 67
X EBCS 2 -1995
- 6.4 CORBELS 67
6.4.1 Definitions and Limitations 68
~ 6.4.2 Design 68
6.5 FOOTINGS ,,68
6.5.1 Moment in Footings 69
6.5.2 Flexural Reinforcement 69
6.5.4 Bearing 69 '
6.5.5 Minimum Footing Depth 70 r
6.5.6 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings 70
6.6 PILE CAPS 70
6.6.1 Moment in Pile Caps 70
6.6.2 Flexural Reinforcement 70
6.6.3 Shear 71
6.6.4 Footings on Two Piles 71
6.6.5 Minimum Thickness 71
6.7 PARTICULAR CASES 71
'6.7.1 Local Forces 71
6.7.2 Concentrated Forces 71
6.7.3 Bursting Forces 72
6.7.4 Indirect Supports 73
CHAPTER 7 -DETAILING PROVISIONS 75
7.1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT 75
7.1.1 General 75
.7.1.2 Bending of Bars 75
7.1.3 Concrete Cover to Reinforcement 75
.7.1.4 Spacing of Reinforcement 77
7.1.5 Bond 77
7.1.5.1 Design Bond Strength 77
7.1.6 Anchorage of Reinforcement 78
7.1.6.1 Basic Anchorage Length 78
7.1.6.2 Required Anchorage Length 78
7.1.6.3 Additional Requirements for Loops 79
7.1.6.4 l1es and Sti~ps 79
7.1.6.5 Laps and Joints 80
7.1.6.6 Additional Rules for Defonned Bars of Large Diameter p > 32 m:m) 80
7.1.6.7 Additional Rules for Bundled Bars 81
7.1.7 Curtailment of Longitudinal Flexural Reinforcement 81
7.1.7.1 Staggering Rule 81
7.1.7.2 Anchorage Length of Reinforcement 82
7.1.7.3 Anchorage of Bottom Reinforcement at Supports 82
.
, .
EBCS 2 -1995 XI
~
:
I
,.
.
j, -
7.2 DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 83
7.2.1 Beams 83
7.2.1.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement 83 .
7.2.1.2 Shear Reinforcement 83
7.2.1.3 Torsional Reinforcement 83
7.2.2 Slabs 84
7.2.2.1 Thickness 84
7.2.2.2 Flexural Reinforcement 84
, 7.2.3 Hollow or Ribbed Slabs 84
7.2.3.1 Sizes 84
7.2.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement 84
7.2.3.3 1ransverse Ribs 85
7.2.4 Columns 85
7.2.4.1 Size 85
7.2.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement 85
7.2.4.3 Lateral Reinforcement 85
7.2.5 WALLS 86 ,
7.2.5.1 Sizes 86
7.2.5.2 Vertical Reinforcement 86
7.2.5.3 Horizontal Reinforcement 87
7.2.5.4 1ransverse Reinforcement 87
7.2.6 Deep Beams 87
7.2.6.1 Thickness 87
7.2.6.2 Supplementary Reinforcement 87
7.2.7 Corbels 88 .
CHAFfER 8 -MATERIAlS AND CONSTRUCTION 89
.
8.1 SCOPE 89
8.2 SPECIFICATION OF CONCRETE 89
8.2.1 Methods of Specifying Concrete 89
8.2.2 Constituent Materials of Concrete 89
8.2.2.1 Cement 89
8.2.2.2 Aggregates 89
8.2.2.3 Water 89
8.2.2.4 Admatures 91
8.2.3 Composition of the Concrete 91
8.2.4 Requirements of Fresh Concrete '-..:;. 91
8.2.4.1 Workability 91
8.2.4.2 Temperature 91
' 8.2.5 Hot Weather Concretini 91
" ,{.;;I;
8 2 5 1 at I 91 f -.;'" ...nera
~ 8.2.5.2 'Placing of Concrttt 91
I 8.2.5.3 Curing of Concrttt 92
I 8.2.6 Minimum Cement Content 92
I 8.2.7 Maximum Cement Content 92
8.3 SPECIFICATION OF REINFORCEMENT 93
I 8.3.1 Basic requirements 93
I
I
I "
I X" EBCS 2. 7995
I
I
\
,
-8.4 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION RULES 93
8.4.1 General 93
.8.4.2 Handling and Storage of the Materials used for Making Concrete 93
8.4.2.1 Cement 93
8.4.3 Batching and Mixing 94
8.4.4 Transporting, Placing and Compacting 94
8.4.5 Construction Joints 94
8.4.6 Formwork 94
8.4.6.1 Basic Requirements 95
8.4.6.2 Surface Finish 95
8.4.6.3 Temporary Work Inserts 96
8.4.6.4 Removal of Formwork and Falsework 96
8.4.7 Curing 96
8.5 REINFORCING STEEL CONSTRUCTION RULES 97
8.5.1 Transport, Storage and Fabrication of the Reinforcement ~7
8.5.2 Surface Condition 97
8.5.3 Welding 97
8.5.4 Joints 97
8.5.5 Fabrication, Assembly and Placing of the Steel 98
8.6 TOLERANCES 98
8.6.1 General 98
8.6.2 Tolerances with regara-to Structural Safety 99
8.6.3 Tolerances for Concrete Cover 99
8.6.4 Tolerances for Construction Purposes 99
.CHAPTER 9 -QUALITY CONTROL 101
9.1 DEFINITIONS 101
.9.2 PRODUCTION CONTROL 101
9.2.1 Inspection of Materials 101
9.2.2 Inspection Prior to Concreting 101
9.2.3 Control of Mixing, Transportation and Placement of Concrete 101
9.2.4 Control for Curing the Concrete 101
9.2.5 Information of Construction Procedures 102
9.3 COMPLIANCE CONTROLS 102
9.3.1 Compliance Controls for Concrete 102
9.3.1.1 Sampling and Testing Methods 102
9.3.1.2 Size of Lot and Frequency of Sampling 102
9.3.1.3 Compliance Criteria 103
9.3.2 Compliance Controls for the Completed Structure 104
9.4 MEASURES TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE 104
9.4.1 General 104
9.4.2 Sequence of Measures 104
9.4.3 Check Tests on Structural Concrete 104
9.4.3.1 General 104
9.4.3.2 1Ypes ofOleck Tests 105
EBCS 2 -1995 xiii
~
~
-
9.4.4 Load Tests of Structure or Parts of Structures 105
9.4.4.1 General 105 ..
9.4.4.2 Test Loads 105 ,
9.4.4.3 Measurements During the Tests 105 i
9.4.4.4 Assessment of Results 1<W>
APPENDIX A -ANALYSIS OF SLABS 107
,
A.1 SCOPE 107
A.2 ONE-WAY SLABS 107
'A.2.1 General .107
A.2.4 Distribution of Concentratoo Loads 107
A.3 TWO-WAY SLABS 107
A.3.1 General 107
A.3.2 Individual Panel Moments ! 108
A.3.3 Moments in Continuous Slabs 110
A.3.3.1 General ': 110
A.3.3.2 Method I .: 110
A.3.3.3 Method 11 112
A.3.4 Elastic Values of Support Moments 112
A.3.5 Loads on Supporting Beams 112
A.4 FLAT SLABS 115
A.4.1 Scope 115
A.4.2 Definitions 115
A.4.3 Analysis of Flat Slab Structures 115 .
A.4.3.1 General 115
A.4.3.2 Equivalent Frame Method 111
A.4.3.3 Simplified Method 11& .
A.4.3.4 Division of Moments Between Colwnn and Middle Strips 119
A.4.4 Design Considerations 119
A.4.4.1 General 119
A.4.4.2 Internal Panels 121
A.4.4.3 Edge Panels 121
A.4.4.4 Moment Transfer Between Slab and Colwnn 122
A.4.4.5 Panel with Marginal Beams or Walls 124
A.4.4.6 Negative Moments at Free Edge 124
A.4.5 Opening in Panels ~;; 124
,
A.4.5.1 General ' 124
A.4.5.2 Holes in Areas Bounded by Colwnn Strips 124
A.4.5.3 Holes in Areas Common to Thlo Colwnn Strips 124
A.4.5.4 Holes in Areas Common to a Colwnn Strip and a Middle Strip 124
APPENDIX B -PRFSf~ED CONCRErE 125
B.1 SCOPE 125
B.2 DATA ON PRESTRESSED STEEL AND PRESTRESSING DEVICES 125.
B.2.1 Prestressing Steel 125
B.2.1.1 General 125
B.2.1.2 OasSijicatiOll and Geometry 125
xiv EBCS 2 -1995 ,
-
.B.2.1.3 Physical Properties 126
B.2.1.4 Mecp.anical Properties 126
B.2.1.4.1 Strength 126
B.2.1.4.2 Stress-Stram Diagram 126
B.2.1.4.3 Ductility C/'.aract'ristics 126
B.2.1.4.4 Modulus of Elasticity 127
B.2.1.4.5 Fatigue 127
B.2.1.4.6 },-[ulti-Axial Stresses 127 ;\'it
B.2.1.5 Technological Frope.rtil!s 127 "s
B.2 .1. 5.1 Surface Conditi'-'l1 127
B.2.1.5.2 Relaxation 127
B.2.1.5.3 Susceptibilit)' to .5tress Corro,\'ion 127
B.2.2 Prestr~ssing Device.s 128
B.2.2.1 Anchorage.\' and CoIl;plers 128
B.2.2.1.1 Genl!rlll 128
B.2.2,1.2 Mec,ltanical Pr(>pertie.s 128
B.2.2.2 Ducts and Sheath.'i 129
B.2,2.2.1 General 129
B.3 BASIS OF DES!GN 129
B.3.! Partial S3fety Factors for Materials 129
B.3.2 Partial Safety Factors f()r .\ction on Building Structures 129
B.4 ANALYSIS 130
B.4.1 Prestressed 5130.5 130
-B.4.2. Anchorage Zcne-,s for Post~Tel\Sioning Forces 130
B.4.3 Determination of the Ef~ect~ of P(e~tre.~sjng 130
B.4.3.1 General 130
.B.4.3.2 Dete;mil1atiol1 o.fPrrstre\'S'in,gforce 131
B.4.3.3 Effects of Prestre.'i.~ing under Service Conl:itions 132
13.4.3.4 F.ffect,\' ofPr-:,.\'tre'ising ot the Ultimate Limit States 132
B.4.3.4.1 Structural Allal~sis -I..inear Methods 132
B.4.3.4.2 De.\"i~71 {)_f-Secli!).'1.~ 132
B.4.3.5 DetelminatitJ1! oflhe Effect.s o.fTime Dependent Deformation of Concrete 13.3 t
B.4.3.5.1 General 133
I B.5. SECTION AND MEMBER DESIGN 134'
B.5.1 Prestressing Steel: General 134
I B.5.2 Physical Properties of Pre.strE',ssing Steel 134
B.5.3 Mechanical Properties of Prestressing Steel 135
B.S.3.1 Strength 135 t
B.5.3.2 Modulus of Ela.\'ticity 135 i
B.5.3.3 ..S'tress-Strain Diagram 135 '
B.5.3.4 Ductility 136
B.5.3.5 Fatigue 136
B.5.3.6 Multi-,ixial Stresses 136
B.5.3.7 Anchorage or Coupler Assemblies of Tendons 136
~ B.S.4 Technological Propertie... of Prestressing Steel 137
B.S.4.1 Relaxation 137
-B.5.4.2 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion 137
B.5.4.3 Temperature Depe71l1ent Behaviour 138
~ EBCS 2 ~ 1995 XV
~
!I
.i
,
B.5.5 Design of Members in Prestressed Concrete 138
B.5.5.1 General 138 .
B.5.5.2 Minimum Strength Class for Prestressed Concrete 138
B.5.5.3 Minimum Number of Prestressing Units in Isolated Structural Elements 138
B.5.5.4 Initial Prestressing Force 139
B.5.5.5 Loss of Prestress 140
B.5.5.6 Anchorage Zones of Pretensioned Members 142
, B.5.5.7 Anchorage Zone.\' of Post-tensioned Members 144
B.5.5.8 Designfor Shear 145
B.5.5.8.1 Members with Inclined Prestre\".\'ing Tendons 145
.B.5.5.9 Limit State of Cracking 145
B.5.5.9.1 General 146
B.5.5.9.2 Minimum Rein:forcement Areas 146
B.5.9.9.3 Control of Cracking without Direct Calculation 146
B.6 DETAILING PROVISIONS 147
B.6.1 Arrangement of the Prestressing Units 147
B.6.2 Concrete Cover 147
B.6.3 Horizontal and Vertical Spacing 147
B.6.3.1 Pre-tensioning 147
B.6.3.2 Post-tensioning 147
B.6.4 Anchorages and Couplers for Prestressing Tendons 147
B.6.5 Anchorage Zones for Post-Tensioning Forces 148
B.7 CONSTRUCTION AND WORKMANSHIP 148
B.7.1 Objectives 148
B.7.2 Basic Requirements 149 .
B.7.3 Transport and Storage of the Tendons 149
B.7.4 Fabrication of Tendons 149
B. 7.5 Placing of Tendons 149 .
B.7.6 Tensioning of the Tendons 150
B. 7 .6.1 Pre-tensioning 150
B.7.6.2 Post-tensioning 150
B.7.7 Grouting and other Protective Measures 151~
B.7.7.2 Cement Grout 151
B. 7.7.3 Instructions to the Site 152
B.7.7.4 Grouting Operations 152
B. 7.7.5 Sealing 152
B.7.7.6 Other Protections 153
B.8 QUALITY CONTROL ~ 153
B.8.1 Objectives 153
B.8.2 Compliance Controls 153
B.8.2 Control prior to Concreting and during Prestressing 153
xvi EBCS 2 -1995 1
.
-CHAPTER 1
-GENERAL ,;f!
\~"
~~
1.1 SCOPE j,
(1) This Code of Practice applies to the design of buildings and civil engineering works in plain,
reinforced and prestressed concrete made with normal weight aggregates.
(2) The Code has been published in two parts:
Part 1: Design, Materials and Construction
Part 2: Design Aids
(3) This Code is only concerned with the requirements for resistance, serviceability and durability of .
concrete structures. Other requirements, such as those concerning thermal or sound insulation, are
not covered.
(4) Construction is covered to the extent that is necessary to indicate the quality of the construction
materials and products which should be used and the standard of workmanship on site needed to
comply with the assumptions of the design rules. Construction and workmanship are covered in
Chapters 8 and 9, and are to be considered as minimum requirements which may have to be further ;
developed for particular types of buildings or civil engineering works and methods of construction. I
.(5) This Code does not cover the special requirements of seismic design. Provisions related to such t
requirements are given in EBCS 8 "Design of Structures for Earthquake Resistance" which F
complements, and is consistent with, EBCS 2. r
.;
(6) Numerical values of the actions on buildings and civil engineering works to be taken into account
in the design are not given in this Code. They are provided in EBCS 1 "Basis of Design and Actions
on Structures" applicable to the various typefi of construction.
(7) The design aids in Part 2 have been prepared in accordance with the assumptions laid down in
Part 1, with the intention that they may be used as standard design aids and so avoid duplication of
efforts by individual design offices. ,
(8) It has been assumed in the drafting of this Code that the design of concrete structures is entrusted
to registered structural or civil engineers, appropriately qualified, for whose guidance it has been
prepared and that the execution of the work is carried out under the direction of appropriately
qualified supervisors.
1.2 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE WORKS
(1) Concrete works are classified as either Class lor II depending on the quality of workmanship and
the competence of the supervisors directing the works.
(2) Works carried out under the direction of appropriately qualified supervisors ensuring the
attainment of level of quality control envisaged in Chapter 9 are classified as Class I works.
EBCS 2 -199'i 1
..
a
.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
(3) Works with a lower level of quality control are classified as Class n works. -
(4) Class n works are permissible only for single story structures.
1.3 UNITS
,
The units used in this Code are those of the International System of units known as SI, and shall be
according to ISO 1000.
1.4 NOT A nONS
The symbols used in this Code are in accordance with ISO Standard 3898. The symbols used in this
Code are as follows:
Ac Area of concrete
Ac,'1 The section of the zone of the concrete where the reinforcing bars can effectively influence the
crack widths
AcA Area of rectangular core of column measured out-to-out of hoop I
Acl Area of concrete within tensile zone. The tensile zone 'is that part of the section which is
calculated to be in tension just before formation of the first crack
Ad Desiin value (specified value) of the accidental action
A, The cross-sectional of the longitudinal rainforcement
AIj Enclosed area within a mean polygonal perimeter
A, Area of prestressing tendon or tendons .
A, Area of tension reinforcement
A", Area of compression reinforcement
A,.. Cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement .
A"cal Theoretical area of reinforcement required by the design
A',1j Area of reinforcement actually provided
A'l Area of transverse reinforcement per unit length perpendicular to the webflange interface
A'A Area of transverse hoop bar
A", The l<?ngitudinal steel inside the slab, within the projection of the slab
Ay The area of shear reinforcement within a distance s
AI Lcaded area of the restricted zone under local contact pressure
A2 Distribution area of the local contact pressure
al Distance for displacing the moment diagram (Fig. 10-3)
ay Shear span
aI' ~ The side length of area AI and Az1 respectively
b Width of wall measured center-to-center of bracing walls, or width measured from the center
of a bracing wall to the free edge, or actual flange width in a T or L beam
b, The effective width of aT-beam
b.. Width of the web or rib of a member
bl Side length of the rectangle of outline u parallel to the eccentricity
b2 Slde lenith of the rectanile of outline u perpendicular to the eccentricity .
b.. Width of the web on T I I, or L beams
I
c Concrete cover
d The distance from extreme compression to centroid of tension rein-forcemtne
dlj The diameter of the lariest circle which can be inscribed within UIj ..
.
'7. ~R~-\" ~ -f aas
it .CHAPTER 1.. GENERAL
:~':
~ .Ec Tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at a stress O'c = 0 and at 28 days
Ecd Design value of the secant modulus of elasticity
Ed Short term elastic modulus of concrete ~
Ec(l) Tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at a stress of O'c = 0 and at time t
Ec. Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
E, Elastic modulus of reinforcement or prestressing steel
Ec(t,) Tangent modulus of elasticity at time tD
EcZ8 Tangent modulus of elasticity at 28 days
e Eccentricity
ea Additional ~entricity according to Eq 4.1
e. Equivalent constant first-order eccentricity of the design axial load
e.q Equivalent uniaxial eccentricity
e, Initial ~entricity
eD Equivalent uniform first order eccentricity
eol Smaller first order eccentricity
eoz Larger first order eccentricity
ez Second-order eccentricity (Section 4.4.10.3).
elDl Total eccentricity in the direction of the larger relative eccentricity
F d Design load
F Ii Characteristic axial load of long duration causing creep
F I +q,i Characteristic total axial load
F i Characteristic load
F p. Ultimate tendon force
F,., Service value
Frequent values
F, Tensile force developed by anchorage
Ibd Design bond strength
/c Compressive strength of concrete
/cd Design compreseive strength of concrete
/c* Characteristic compressive stren~h of concrete
/c. Mean value of concrete compressive streneth
/cr..! Tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may first be expected to
occur
!rid Desiin tensile streneth of concrete
/clt Characteristic tensile streneth of concrete
/c... Mean value of axial tensile streneth of concrete
Id Desiin strenith
it Characteristic strenith
/p Tensile strenith of prestressin steel ~c'
lpi Charactersistic tensile strenerh of prestressini steel ,,'
lpO,1 0.1 % proof-stress of prestressing steel
lpO,l* Charactersistic 0.1 % proof-stress of prestressing steel
./, Tensile strenitb of reinforcement
.
lit Characteristic tensile str~nith of reinforcement
., /y Yield strenith of reinforcement
1)Id' Desiin yield strenith of reinforcement
: I~ Characteristic yield strenith of reiforcement
I Iywd Desiin yield strenitb of stirrups
~ !o.z Yield 8trenith of reinforcement at 0.2% offsct ".
EBCS 2 -1995 3
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
GbId Indirect action
Gt Characteristic permanent load ~,
Gt,;"! Lower characteristic value of the permanent action 1
Gt,Iop Upper characteristic value of the permanent action
GtJ Characteristic value of permanent actions
G, Permanent stabilizing action
G2 Permanent non-stabilizing action
,
gd is the uniformly distributed design permanent load
h Overall depth of section in the plane of bending. Cross-sectional dimension in the direction
of buckling
he! Thickness of equivalent hollow section
h! Thickness of flange
hI Height of supported beam
h2 Height of girder
Ico II Moments of inertia of the concrete and reinforcement sections, respectively, of the substitute
column, with respect to the centroid of the concrete section
I, Sec6nd moment area of the uncracked transformed concrete section
i Radius of gyration
ip Dispertion length
J (1,10) Creep function at time t .
Kc Flexural stiffness of column
Keq Flexural stiffness of equivalent column ~
Kif Effective beam stiffness coefficient (EIIL)
K, Total lateral stiffness of the columns of the story (story rigidity), with modulus of elasticity
taken as unity
k Relative eccentricity ratio
Unintentional angular displacement (per unit length) related to the profile of the tendons
k Coefficient which takes account of the nature of the stress distribution within the section
c
immediately prior to cracking
k, ,~ Margin of strength
L Clear span or clear height of a member
Le Effective buckling length
Lc Distance between points of zero moments
Lx Length of the shorter sid~ of a panel
4 Length of the longer side of a panel
I Nominal dimension
10 Anchorage length
Ib Basic anchorage length .
Ib""u. Minimum anchorage length
Ib"", Required anchorage length
I" Length of clear span in direction that moments are being determined, measured face-to-face of
supports
10 Let'lgth of lap of bars ~
4 EBCS 2 -1995 .
"':
CHAPTER 7: GENERAL
I.,miIt Minimum lap length
Ip Transmission length
I, Distance between points of zero shear
II Length of span in direction that moments are being determined, measured center-tocenter of
supports
lz Length of span transverse to It, measured center-to-center of supports
Mbal Balanced moment capacity of the column.
Mcr Theoretical cracking moment
Md Design moment at the critical section including second-order effects
Mt Maximum applied moment at mid-span due to sustained characteristic loads
Mo Total factored static moment ;'
M'd Design value of the applied internal bending moment
M. Ultimate moment
M1 Smaller first order moment due to design load
M2 Larger first order moment due to design load
mJ Span moment in two-way slab
~ Moment per unit width at the point of reference
.mzJ Span moment in the shorter direction of a panel
~J Span moment in the longer direction "'1 a panel
Ncr Critical value for failure in a sway mode
Nd Design axial load
-Ndt Maximum design axial load acting on a column or wall during an eal1hquake
NId Transverse tensile force
NSd Design axial force (tension or compression)
-NM Ultimate axial load
NMb Axial load capacity of simultaneous assumed strain of concrete and yielding of tension steel
n Number of bars in a bundle
Modular ratio, E,/Eclft
~p c Loss due to elastic deformation of the member at transfer
P d Design value of prestress at ultimate limit state
~P1r Short-term relaxation loss
Pt,'IIp' Pt,~J are respectively the upper and lower characteristic values
P 1ft Prestress after occurrence of all losses
P 1ft ,0 Initial prestress at time 1 = 0
P 1ft ,I Mean value of the prestressing at time 1 and at a particular point along the member
Po Initial force at the active end of the tendon immediately after stressing
~P'I Loss due to anchorage slip
~P,(l) Loss due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at time 1
~P ,.(x) Loss due to friction
,
,
Qt Characteristic imposed loads
Qt, I Characteristic values of one of the variable actions
Qt, I Characteristic value of the other variable actions
Q, Variable non-stabilizing action
qd Uniformly distributed design live load
.R, Coefficient given in Table A-2
EBCS 2 -7995 5
S~ Design situation for combination of action for ultimate limit states for persistent and transient .
design situation
s Shear reinforcement spacing in the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement
s~ Spacing of horizontal stirrups
s- Maximum spacing between stirrups
s. .Standard deviation of the set of sampl,e results
s,. Average distance between cracks
sr Spacing of vertical stirrups
Tc Torque caried by the concrete
T,/ Torsional resistance of the reinforcement
T u Torsional resistance of a section
T Id Design torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
t Time
to Time at initial loading of the concrete
" Periphery of critical section
"'f Mean polygonal perimeter
Vc Shear carried by the concrete
V cd Shear resistance of the concrete
V cw Additional shear force of a member subjected to axial force
V ~ Shear resistance of horizontal stirrups
V u Shear resistance of a section -
V UI Shear resistance to inclined compression
V K4l Shear resistance to diagonal tension
V, Shear resistance of vertical stirrups .
V.fd Shear acting along the periphery" of the critical section
v Punching shear
vl4 Longitudinal unit shear
Punching unit shear
v 14.- Maximum punching unit shear
Wi Characteristic crack. width
w. Mean crack. width
WI Limining value of crack. width
Wz Limiting value of crack. width
.% Neutral axis depth
.%I,.%z~ Strength of lot
Z Section Modulus
z Internal lever arm
a Coefficient for biaxial bending of columns (Table 5-1)
Ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural stiffness of a width of slab bounded
laterally by center lines of adjacent panels (if any) on each side of a beam
ac Ratio of flexural stiffness of columns abOve and below the slab to combined flexural stiffness
of the slabs and beams at a joint taken in the direction of the span for which moments are being
determined
~ &.,.~ ~ -.,GG ~:
.CHAPTER 1: GENERAL
acl Ratio of the sum of the column stiffnesses to the sum of the beam ~tiffnesses at one end of the
-column
ac2 Ratio of the sum of the column stiffnesses to the sum of the beam stiffnesses at the other end
of the column
acmlll The minimum of acl and ac2
atc Ratio of flexural stiffness of equivalent column to combined flexural stiffness of the slabs and
beams at a joint taken in the direction of the span for which moments are being determined ,
al Coefficient given in Table A-1 as function of aspect ratio Ly 11.% and support conditions
amlll , Minimum ac
al a in the direction of 11
a2 a in the direction of 12
{3 Shear coefficient given by Eq.6-13
Deflection coefficient depending on the loading condition
Ratio of long side to short sipe of footing
{3a Coefficient for effective depth given in Table 8-1
Ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit area (in each case without load factors)
{3a Factor for transmission length of prestressing strand
{3, Reduction factor for torsion due to combined action effects
{3v Reduction factor for shear due to combined action effects
'Y c Partial safety factor for concrete
'Y! Partial safety factor for loads
Fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by flexure at slab-column connection
'Ym Partial safety factor for materials
'Y p Partial safety factor for prestress
'Y. Partial safety factor for steel
'Y F' 'Y G' 'Y 12' 'Y A and 'Y p Partial safety factors for the action cnn...irlpred taking account of, for example, k
the possibility of unfavorable deviation of the actions
'YG,III! Lower value of the partial safety factor for the permanent action
'Y G,sup Upper value of the partial safety factor for th~ permanent action
'Y GJ Partial safety factor for permanent action j
'Y GA. i as 'Y G. i' but for accidental design situations
~Gp.c+.+r Variation of stress in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at location x, at time
l
Gpgo Initial stress in the tendons due to prestress and permanent actions
~Gpr Variation of stress in the tendons at section x due to relaxation
E.(l, l,J Estimated shrinkage strain, derived from the values in Table 2.7 for final shrinkage
ltI(l, l.J Creep coefficient, as defined in Section 2.5.4
0 Reduction coefficient for redistribution of moments
0, Deflection due to the theoretical cracking moment Mcr acting on the uncracked transformed
section
01/ Deflection due to the balance of the applied moment over and above the cracking value and
,.,t acting on a section with an equivalent stiffness of 75% of the cracked value.
:~ OmIU Deflection of fully cracked section
01/llU Deflection of fully cracked section
EBCS 2 -7995 7
;1;'
Ec Strain in concrete fiber
E. Strain of reinforcement
E"" Mean strain of reinforcement considering the contribution of concrete in tension
EI The larger concrete strain below the neutral axis of the cracked section
E2 The smaller concrete strain below the neutral axis of the cracked section
Ec.~' Final shirinkage strain
Eyt Characteristic value of the elongation at maximum load
e Sum of the angular displacements over a distance x (irrespective of direction or sign)
K", Correction coefficient to take account of the effect of the slope of stirrups on the spacing of
cracks
K( Coefficient which characterises the bond properties of bars
K2 Coefficient representing the influence of the form of the strees diagram
>.. Slenderness of a column
Coefficient for standard deviation of the set of sample results ,1
IJ. Coefficient of friction between the tendons and their ducts ]
JI Relative design axial load
.
p Geometrical ratio of reinforcement
p. Effective geometrical ratio of reinforcement
Pu Geometrical ratio of reinforcement in the x direction
Pey Geometrical ratio of reinforcement in the y direction -
Pmax Maximum geometrical ratio of reinforcement
PmiJI Minimum geometrical ratio of reinforcement
P'" Geometrical ratio of web reinforcement -
P""miJI Minimum geometrical ratio of web reinforcement
(Jcpo Initial stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to prestress
(JC8 Stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and any other permanent
actions
(JCI Maximum tensile stress in the concrete appropriate to a serviceability limit state
(Jo,max Maximum stress applied to the tendon
(Jpmo Stress in the tendon immediately after tensioning or transfer
(J. Maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after formation of the c~ck
(J., Steel stress at rupture of concrete section
tP Diameter of reinforcement bar
tP(I"O) Creep coefficient
4(.".,) Final creep coefficient
tPb Diameter of bars forming the bundle
tP. Effective diameter of the bundle
tP(I",,) Creep coefficient related to the elastic deformation at 28 days
(U Mechanical reinforcement ratio
.
~oFk Combination values
~2Fk Quasi-permanent values
~o Combination value
~I Frequent value
~2 Quasi-permanent value
~O'~I'~2 Partial safety factors defined in Section 3.4.4 (3). -
n
.
.CHAPTER 2 ~~
DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL ~~:\
"
~,., ":Ii
;;;'
jJ'"
2.1 GENERAL i ~;
~,
F~
(1) The strength and other. data for the concrete are defined on the basis of standard testa. t~
..-;, ,
2;2 GRAD~ OF CONCRETE
(1) Concrete is graded in terms of its characteristic compressive cube strength. The grade of concrete
to be used in design depends on the cl~sification of the concrete work and the intended use. ;~I
...
.r
(2) Table 2.1 gives the permissible grades of concrete for the two classes of concrete works.
g
(3) The numbers in the grade designation denote the specified characteristic compressive strength in
MPa. , ,;
.;
Table 2.1 Grades of Concrete ~
~
.Class Permissible Grades of Concrete t
I C5 C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 CSO C6O t
ri
-n C5 C15 C20 W '"
c
,
,
Grade C5 shall be used only as lean concrete i
t
t
2.3 CHARACTERISTIC COMPRF$SIVE STRENGm OF CONCRETE
(1) For the purpose of this Code, compressive strength of concrete is determined from tests on 150
mm cubes at the age of 28 days in accordance with Ethiopian Standards.
(2) The characteristic compressive strength is defined as that strength below which 5% of all possible
strength measurements may be expected to fall. In practice, the concrete may be regarded as
complying with the grade specified for the design if the results of the tests comply with the acceptance
criteria laid down in Chapter 9.
(3) Cylindrical or cubical specimens of other sizes may also be used with conversion factors
determined from a comprehensive series of tests. In the absence of such tests, the conversion factors
given in Table 2.2 may be applied to obtain the equivalent characteristic strength on the basis of 150
mm cubes.
(4) In Table 2.3 the characteristic cylinder compressive strength!.! are given for the different grades
of concrete.
EBCS 2 -1995 9
~
"
ETHIOPIAN DUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
~ ,..~.~ .
Table 2.2 Conversion Factors for Strength
Size and Type of Test Specimen 'Cbnversion Factor ~
Cube (200 mm) 1.05
Cylinder (150 mm diameter 300 mm height) 1.25
\
Table 2.3 Grades of Concrete and Characteristic Cylinder Compressive Strength I.k
Grades of
Concrete C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60
1.1 12 16 20 24 32 40 48
2.4 CHARACTERISTIC TENSILE STRENGnI ~~
.c'
c"
;~:\if (1) In this Code, the char.acteristic tensile strength refers to the axial tensile stren~ as determined :i~~
by tests ip accordance with standards issued or approved by Ethiopian Standards. ;~
(2) In the absence of more accurate data, the characteristic tensile strength may also be determined
from the characteristic cylinder compressive strength according to Eq. 2.1.
I.It = 0.7icbn (2.1) ~
wherehbn is the mean value given by Eq. 2.2.
icbn = 0.3ick2/3 (2.2)
(3) The corresponding values oficlt andhbn for the different grades of concrete are given in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Grades of Concrete and Values of I./A and I./m
Grades of
Concrete C15 C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60
icbn 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0
hit 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.7 2.1 2.5 2.8
2.5 DEFORMATION PROPERTI~ OF CONCRETE
(1) The values of the material properties required for the calculation of i~tantaneous and time
dependent deformations of concrete depend not only upon the grades of concrete but also upon the -
properties of the aggregates and other parameters related to the mix design and the environment. For
this reason, where an accurate calculation is considered necessary, the values shall be established fromI
known data appropriate to the particular materials and conditions of use. For many calculations an
approximate estimate will usually be sufficient.II
-1
10 EBCS 2 -1995
~
1
.CHAPTER 2: DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL
2.5.1 Stress-Strain Diagrams
(1) Any idealized stress-strain diagram which results in prediction of strength in substantial agreement
with the results of comprehensive tests may be used (see Section 4.4)
2.5.2 Modulus of Elasticity
(1) The modulus of elasticity depends not only on the concrete grade but also on the actual properties
of the aggregates used (see Section 2.5(1) above).
~
(2) In the absence of more accurate data, or in cases where great accuracy is not required, an estimate '. i
of the mean value of the secant modulus Ecm can be obtained from Table 2.5 for a given concrete
grade. ' I
I
Table 2.5 Values of the Secant Modulus of Elasticity Ec,," in GPa
Grades of
Concrete CIS C20 C25 C30 C40 C50 C60
Ecm 26 27 29 32 35 37 39
(3) The values in Table 2.5 are based on the following equation:
.-Ecm = 9.5 ifck + 8)1/3 (2.3)
Where Ecm is in GPa andfck is in MPa. They relate to concrete cured under normal conditions'and
-made with aggregates predominantly consisting of quartzite gravel. When deflections are of great
importance, tests shall be carried out on concrete made with the aggregate to be used in the
structure. In other cases experience with a particular aggregate, backed by general test data, will
often provide a reliable value for Ecm' but with unknown aggregates, it would be advisable to
consider a range of values.
(4) As a rule, since the grade of concrete corresponds to a strength at an age of 28 days, the values
of Ecm in Table 2.5 also relate to that same age. Where great accuracy is not required, Ecm can also
be determined from Eq.2.3 for a concrete age t other than 28 days. In this case, tk is replaced by the
actual cylinder concrete strength at time t.
2.5.3 Poisson's Ratio
(1) Any value between 0 and 0.2 can be adopted for Poisson's ratio.
2.5.4 Creep and Shrinkage
(1) Creep and shrinkage of the concrete depend mainly on the ambient humidity, the dimensions of
the element and the composition of the concrete, Creep is also influenced by the maturity of the
concrete when the load is first applied and on the duration and magnitude of the loading. Any
estimation of the creep coefficient ct>(I./OJ' and of the basic shrinkage strain, fcs' shall take these
parameters into account.
.EBCS 2 -1995 11.
"'f!
~ --1
-"c""
.
,...
I
I
.
(2) In cases where great accuracy is not required, the values given in Tables 2.6 and 2.7 respectively
can be considered as the final creep coefficient cp(~.",) and the final shrinkage strain Ec.r of a normal ~
weight concrete subjected to a compressive stress not exceeding 0.45tk at the time to at fIrst loading.
(3) The data given in Tables 2.6 and 2.7 apply for a range of the mean temperature of the concrete
between 10 C and 20 C. Maximum seasonal temperature up to 40 C can be accepted. In the same
way, variations in relative humidity around the mean values given in Tables 2.6 and 2.7 between RH
=,20% and RH = 100% are acceptable.
(4) Linear interpolation between the values in Tables 2.6 and 2.7 is permitted.
Table 2.6 Final Creep Coefficient ~(""') of Normal Weight Concrete
Notional size 2Aju (in mm)
Age at
Loading 50 150 600 50 150 600
t
(da;s) Dry atmospheric Humid atmospheric
conditions (inside) conditions (outside)
(RH = 50%) (RH = 80%)
1 5.5 4.6 3.7 3.6 3.2 2.9
7 3.9 3.1 2.6 2.6 2.3 2.0
28 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.9 1.7 1.5
90 2.4 2.0 1.6 1.5 1.4 1.2
365 1.8 1.5 1.2 1.1 1.0 1.0 -
Table 2.7 Final Shrinkage Strains fcl~ (in 0/00) of Normal Weight Concrete
Location of Relative humidity Notional size 2Aju (mm)
the number (%) ~ 150 600
Inside 50 -0.60 -0.50
Outside 80 -0.33 -0.28
where: Ac = cross-sectional area or concrete
u = perimeter of that area
(5) The values of Tables 2.6 and 2.7 apply to concrete having plastic consistency when fresh. For
concrete of other consistency the values have to be multiplied by 0.70 (stiff consistency) or 1.20 (soft
consistency)
(6) For concrete with superplasticizers, the consistency before adding the superplasticizers is used for
the evaluation of the creep and shrinkage coefficients as given in Tables 2.6 and 2.7. .
2.5.5 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
(1) The coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken as 10' x 10-6 per OC.
12 EBCS 2 -1995 .
.
i:,'
~ CHAPTER 2: DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL
2.6 CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH OF REINFORCING STEEL
~ (1) The mechanical and technological properties of steel used for reinforced concrete shall be defined
by standard and/or agr~ment documents or by certificates of compliance.
(2) The characteristic strength fyt is defined as the 5% fractile of the proof stress /y or 0.2 % offset
strength, denoted as /0.2
(3) If the steel supplier guarantees a minimum value for f, or /0.2' that value may be taken as the
characteristic strength.
2.7 CLASSIFICATION AND GEOMETRY OF REINFORCING STEEL
(1) Reinforcing steel shall be classified according to:
(a) Grade, denoting the value of the specified characteristic yield stress <l;J in MPa.
(b) Class, indicating the ductility characteristics
(c) Size
(d) Surface characteristics
(e) Weldability
(2) Each consignment shall be accompanied by a certificate containing all the information necessary
for its identification with regard to (a) to (e) above, and additional information where necessary.
(3) The actual cross sectional area of the products shall not differ from their nominal cross sectional
area by more than the limits specified in relevant Standards.
-(4) In this Code, two classes of ductility are defined (see Section 2.9.2):
(a) high (Class A)
(b) normal (Class B)
(5) In this Code two shapes of surface characteristics are defined:
(a) Ribbed bars, resulting in high bond action
(b) Plain, smooth bars, resulting in low bond action.
(6) For other types of bar, with other surface characteristics (ribs or indentations), reference should
be made to relevant documents, based on test data.
(7) Welded fabric, used as reinforcing steel, shall comply with the dimensional requirements in
relevant Standards.
2.8 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF REINFORCING STEEL
(1) The following mean values may be assumed:
(a) Density 7 850 kg/m3
(b) Coefficient of thermal expansion 10 x 10-6 per DC
EBCS 2 -1995 13
2.9 MECHANICAL PROPERTI~ OF REINFORCING &TEEL
2.9.1 Strel1lth
(1) The yield stress!,. and the tensile strength!. are defined respectively u the charactetiltlc value
of the yield load, and the characteristic maximum load in direct axial tension, each divided by the
l1ominal cross sectional area.
(2) For products without a pronounced yield stress!,. ,the 0.2% proof stressfo.~ may be substituted.
2.9..2 Ductility
(1) The products shall have adequate ductility in elongation, as specified in relevant Standards.
(2) Adequate ductility in elongation may be assumed, for design purposes, if the products satisfy the
following ductility requirements:
(a) High ductility: E. > S % ; value of (J; /1,). > 1.08
(b) Nonnal ductility: E. > 2.S %; value of (J; /1,). > 1.0S
In whicH E. denotes the characteristic value of the elongation at maximum load.
(3) High bond bars with diameters less than 6 mm shall not be treated as having high ductility.
(4) The products shall have adequate bendability for the anticipated use.
2.9.3 Str~s-Strain Diagram -
(1) In the absence of more accurate infonnation, an elasto-plastic diagram can be used for hot rolled
steel or steel cold worked by drawing pr rolling.
(2) For other types of production, the actual stress-strain diagrams can be replaced by bil inear,
trilinear or other diagrams chosen so that the approximations are on the safe side.
2.9.4 Modulus of Elasticity
(1) The mean value of modulus of elasticity E, may be assumed as 200 GPa. !
2.9.5 Fatigue
(1) Where required, the products shall have adequate fatigue strength.
2.10 TECHNOLOGICAL PROPERTI~
2.10.1 Bond and Anchorage
(1) The surface characteristics of ribbed bars shall be such that adequate bond is obtained with the
concrete, permitting the full force that is assumed in design, to be developed in the reinforcement. -
(2) Ribbed bars, having projected ribs not satisfying the requirements for high bond bars given in
reievant standards shall be treated as plain bars with respect to bond.
.
14 EBCS.2. 1995 .
CHAPTER 2: DATA ON CONCRETE AND STEEL
(3) The behavior in bond of reinforcing steels with other surface shapes shall be defined in relevant
Standards or technical approved documents.
(4) The strength of the welded joints along the anchorage length of welded fabric shall be adequate.
(5) The strength of the welded joint can withstand a shearing force not less than 30% of a force
equivalent to the specified characteristic yield stress times the nominal cross sectional area of the
anchored wire.
2.10.2 Weldability
(1) The products shall have weldability properties adequate for the anticipated use
(2) Where required, and where the weldability is unknown, tests should be requested.
(3) Ductility characteristics; as specified in Section 2.9.2, shall be maintained, when necessary, at
sections near to weld.
..
.
EBCS 2 .7995 15
.
!
; , j
,
I
i\~
\
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK] -
..
16 EBCS 2 -1995
..
.CHAPTER 3
-BASIS OF DESIGN
3.1 FUNDAMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
(1) A structure shall be designed and constructed in such a way that:
(a) With acceptable probability, it will remain fit for the use for which it is required, having due
regard to its intended life, and
(b) with appropriate degrees of reliability, it will sustain all actions and influences likely to occur
during normal execution and use and have adequate durability.
(2) A structure shall also be designed in such a way that it will not be damaged by events like
explosions, impact or consequences of human errors, to an extent disproportionate to the origin,\!
cause.
,
(3) The potential damage due to the events in (2) above shall be minimized or avoided by appropriate
choice of one or more of the following:
(a) Avoiding, eliminating or reducing the hazards which the structure is to sustain.
(b) Selecting a structural form which has low sensitivity to the hazards considered.
(c) Selecting a structural form and design that can survive adequately the accidental removal of
an individual element.
(d) Tying the structure together.
(4) The above requirements shall be met by the choice of suitable materials, by appropriate design
and detailing and by compliance with control procedures for production, construction and use
.envisaged in this Code.
r 3.2 LIMIT srA~
3.2.1 General
(1) A structure, or part of a structure, is considered unfit for use when it exceeds a particular state,
called a limit state, beyond which it infringes one of the criteria governing its performance or use.
(2) All relevant limit states shall be considered in the design so as to ensure an adequate degree of
safety and serviceability. The usual approach will be to design on the basis of the most critical limit
state and then to check that the remaining limit states will not be reached.
(3) The limit states can be placed in two categories:
(a) The Ultimate Limit States are those associated with collapse, or with other forms of structural
failure which may endanger the safety of people. States prior to structural collapse which,
for simplicity. are considered in place of the collapse itself are also treated as ultimate limit
.states.
(b) The Serviceability Limit States correspond to states beyond which specified service
requirements are no longer met.
.
.EBCS 2 -1995 17
!
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE -
3.2.2 Ultimate Limit Stat~
(1) The ultimate limit states which may require consideration include:
(a) Loss of equilibrium of a part or ~e whole of the structure considered as a ri&id body"
(b) Failure by excessive deformation, rupture or loss of stability of the structure or my part of
, it, including supports and foundations.
3.2.3 Serviceability Umit State
(1) Serviceability limit states which may require co~ideration include;
(a) Deformations or deflections which affect the appearance or effective use of the structure
(including the malfunction of machines or services) or cause damage to finishes of non-struc-
tural elements.
(b) Vibration which causes discomfort to people, damage to the building or its contents, or which
limits its functional effectiveness.
(0) Cracking of the concrete which is likely to affect appearance, durability or water tightness
adversely.
3.3 D~IGN SITUAnONS
(1) Design situations are classified as:
(a) Persistent situations corresponding to normal conditions of use of the structure. -
(b) Transient situations, such as those, for example during construction or repair.
(c) Accidental situations. .
3.4 ACnONS
3.4.1 Definitions and Principal Classification
(1) An action F is:
(a) A force (load) applied to the structure (direct action), or
(b) an imposed deformation (indirect action); for example, temperature effects or settlement.
(2) Actions are classified:
(a) By their variation in time:
(i) Permanent actions (G), e.g. self-weight of structures, fittings ancillaries and fIXed
equipment.
(ii) Variable actions (Q), e.g. imposed loads or wind loads.
(iii) Accidental actions (A), e.g. explosions or impact from vehicles.
(b) By their spatial variation: .
(i) Fixed actions, e.g. self-weight.
(ii) Free actions, which result in different arrangements of actions, e.g. movable imposed -
loads and wind loads.
(3) Prestressing (F) is a permanent action but, for practical reasons, it is treated s~parately. .:
18 EBCS 2 -1995 -
I
.,:
CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESION
-.' -
C4). Indirect actions are either permanent Ow (e.g. settlement of support) or variable~ (e.g.
.temperature) and are treated accordingly.
(S) Supplementary classifications relating to the response of the structure are given in the relevant
,sections CJf this Code.
3.4.2 ~epr~entative Values of Actions
(1) For verification in the partial safety factor method, actio~ are introduced into the calculations by
representative values, i.e. by values corresponding to certain levels of intensity. For different
calculations, one may have to distinguish different representative values of an action according to its
variation in time. The comp~ete set of representative values is as follows:
(a) Characteristic values, Fk
(b) Combination values, ~oFk
(c) Frequent values, ~IFk
(d) Quasi-permanent values, ~.}f k
The above values are evaluated mainly o~ a statistical basis.
(2) l+.:'!uimum values and minimum values, whi-:h may be zero, are defined when appropriate.
(3) Depending on the variation with time of certain actions, their representative values are sometimes
subclassified as actions of long duration (or sustained actions) or of short duration (or transient
actionS). In special cases, certain actions have their representative values divided into sustained and
transient components.
.3.4.3 Representative Values of Permanent Actions
(1) The representative values of permanent actions are specified as:
(a) The characteristic values Fk specified in EBCS 1 -"Basis of Design and Actions on
Structures", or
(b) by the client, or the designer in consultation with the client, provided that minimum
provisions, specified in the relevant codes or by the competent authority, are observed.
(2) The other representative values are assumed to be equal to those in Section 3.4.2(1).
(3) For permanent actions where the coefficient of variation is large or where the actions are likely
to vary during the life of the structure (e.g. for some superimposed permanent loads), two
characteristic values are distinguished, an upper (Ok ) and a lower (Ok. 11'/). Elsewhere, a single
characteristic value (GJ is sufficient.
(4) The self-weight of the structure may, in most cases, be calculated on the basis of the nominal
I dimensions and mean unit masses.
a
EBCS 2 -1995 19
3.4.4 Representative Values or Variable Actions
(1) The main representative value is the characteristic value Q..
(2) For variable actions, the characteristic value (QJ corresponds to either:
(a) The upper value with an intended probability of not being exceeded or the lower value with
an intended probability of not being reached, during some reference period, having regard
~ to the intended life of the structure or the assumed duration of the design situation, or
(b) the specified value.
(3) Other representative values are expressed in terms of the characteristic value Q. by means of a
factor 1/1/. These values are defined as:
(a) Combination value: 1/10 Q.
(b) Frequent value: 1/11 Q.
(c) Quasi-permanent value: 1/12 Q.
(4) Supplementary representative values are used for fatigue verification and dynamic analysis.
~ (5) The factors 1/Ii are specified:
1 (a) in EBCS1 -"Basis of Design and Actions on Structures", or
t (b) by the client or the designer in conjunction with the client, provided that minimum
1 provisions, specified in the relevant codes or by the competent public authority, are observed. .
~ 3.4.5 Representative Values or Accidental Actions
~
~ (1) The representative value of accidental actions is the characteristic value A. (when relevant) and .
~~): generally correspond to a specified unique nominal value beyond which there is. no longer an
~~': assurance of a probability of survival of the structure.
.
(2) Their service, combination and frequent values are considered negligible or zero.
I 3.4.6 Design Values of Actions
,
I (1) The design value F d of an action is expressed in general terms as
I
I Fd = "fFF. (3.1)
I Specific examples are:
I Gd = "fG G.
~f,.;",' , Qd = "fa Q. or "fa 1/1/ Q.
;.,;, Ad = "fA A. (if Ad is not directly specified) (3.2)
Pd = "fp P.
where "fF' "fG, "fa' "fA and "fp are the partial safety factors for the action considered taking
account of, for exaIr!ple, the possibility of unfavorable deviations of the actions, the .
possibility of inaccurate modelling of the actions, uncertainties in the assessment of effects
of actions, and uncertainties in the assessment of the limit state considered. -
20 EBCS 2 -7995
-
---c,
, -"~'" "';""'-",',
..
CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN
.t
(2) The upper and lower design values of permanent actions are expressed as follows: ..f
~ (a) Where only a single characteristic value Gk is used, then i
G" = "Ya Gk
G".ir( = "Ya..;- Gk
(b) Where upper and lower characteristic values of permanent actions are used, then
G" = "Ya Gk G".ir( = "Ya.ir( Gk,ir(
where Gk, ir( is the lower characteristic value of the permanent action
Gk, is the upper characteristic value of the permanent action
"Y a. ir( is the lower value of the partial safety factor for the permanent action
"Y a. is the upper value of the partial safety factor for the permanent action
3.4. 7 ~ign valu~ of the Effects of Actions
(1) The effects of actions are responses (e.g. internal forces and moments, stresses, strains) of the
structure to the actions. Design values of the effects of actions are determined from the design values
of the actions, geometrical data and material properties when relevant.
(2) In some cases, in particular for nonlinear analysis, the effect of the randomness of the inten,sity
of the actions and the uncertainty associated with the analytical procedures, e.g. the models used i~
the calculations, shall be considered separately. This may be achieved by the application of a
coefficient of model uncertainty, either applied to the actions or to the internal forces and moments.
3.5 MATERlAI..S
3.5.1 Characteristic Strength
(1) A material property is represented by a characteristic value which in general corresponds to a
fractile in the assumed statistical distribution of the particular property of the material, specified by
relevant standards and tested under specified conditions.
(2) In certain cases, a nominal value is used as the characteristic value.
(3) The characteristic strength of concrete and steel is defined in Sections 2.3 and 2.6, respectively,
3.5.2 Design Strength
i (1) The design strength for a given material property and limit state is obtained, in principle, by
j divi~ing the characteristic strengthh by the appropriate partial safety factor for the material property
I "Y~, I.e.,
'.
j J;
; 1: .-.!:- (3.3)
: " "Y..
t (2) However, in the case of concrete under compression, a further correction factor is introduced in
this Code for convenience (see Eq. 3.4).
.
EBCS 2 -7995 21
.
..
3.5.3 Partial Safety Factors for Materials
3.5.3.1 Ultimate Umit State A
(1) Partial safety factor for materials appropri~te to various design situations, ordinary and accidental,
are given in Tables 3.1 and 3.2 for the two classes of concrete works, Class I and Class II,
re~pectively .
\
Table 3.1 Partial Safety Factor for Materials -CI3SS I Wor~
Design Situations Concrete, "t'o Reinforcing Steel, 'YI
Persistent and Transient 1.50 1.15
Accidental 1.30 1.00
Table 3.2 Partial Safety Factor for Materials -Class II Wor~
Design Situations Concrete, 'Yo Reinforcing Steel, 'YI
Persistent and Transient 1.65 1.20
Accidental 1.45 1.10
3.5.3.2 Serviceability Umit States .
(1) The value of 'YIft in the serviceability limit states may be taken as 1.0 for both steel and concrete. .
3.5.4 Design Strength for Concrete
(1) The design strength of concrete is defined by:
(a) In compression
0.85101
Iod = --:;:- (3.4)
(b) In tension
f f.tk
old = -;:y-: (3.5)
3.5.5 Design Strength for Steel
(1) The design strength of steel in tension and compression is defined by:
f .
fyd = { (3.6)
22 EBCS 2 -1995
,
~
3.6 COMBINATION OF ACTIONS
.~ 3.6:1 Ultimate Limit States
(1) The combination of actions for the ultimate limit states for persIstent and transient design situation
~hall be in accordance with Eq, 3,7:
Sd =S
{ E'YG,jGt,j + 'YQ,lQt,1 + L 'YQ,/If'O,/Qt'i
} (3.7)
/ >1
I (2) The combination for accidental design situation shall be
.1 Sd =
{ E'YG4,j + Ad + If'J,lQt,1 + L 1f'2,JQt,1} (3,8)
/ >1
wher~ Gtj is the characteristic value of permanent actions
Qt,l is the characteristic value of one of the variable actions
I Qt, / is the characteristic value of the other variable actions
A d is the design value (specified value) of the accidental action
i 'Y Gj is the partial safety factor for permanent action j
'Y G4, j is as 'Y Gj' but for accidental design situations
'YQ,/ is the partial safety factor for variable action i
If'o, If'l, 1f'2 are partial safety factors defined in Section 3.4.4 (3).
: (3) Combinations for accidental design situations either involve an explicit accidental action A (e.g.
:- shock) or refer to a situation after an accidental event (A = 0). Unless specified otherwise, 'YG4 = 1
I may be used.
'.
I (4) Partial safety factors for various design situations are given in Table 3,3.
Table 3.3 Partial Safety Factors for Actions in Building Structures
Design Factor
Situation Action 'Y Favorable Unfavorable
Persistent Permanent 'Y G 1.00 1,30
and
Transient Variable 'YQ 0 1.60
Accidental Permanent 'Y G 1.00 1.00
(5) For building structures, Eq, 3.9 may be used in lieu of Eqs, 3.7 and 3.8:
Sd = S(1.30G + 1.60QvJ (3.9a)
I Sd = S(1.0G + 1.60QM) " (3.9b)
.Sd = S(1.20(G + Qvt + QM) (3.9c)
.
I
.Sd = S(A" + G + Qvi) (3.9d)
(), Ii (1'5 ~ -r I""~) f.J..s,)-'
EBCS 2 -1995 23
.., ,
(6) The combination for static equilibrium may be taken as
S" = S(0.9G1 -1.IG2 -1.6QJ (3.10)
where G1 is the permanent stabilizing action
G2 is the permanent non-stabilizing action
QI is the variable non-stabilizing action r'
, -
3.7 ANALYSIS OF LINE ELEMENTS
3.7;1 Methods of Analysis
(1) For analysis in the Ultimate Limit State, plastic, non-linear and linear elastic theory may be
applied.
(2) Elastic methods of analysis may be applied for analysis in the Serviceability Limit State and for
the Alternate Design method.
3.7.2 Load Arrangements and Load Cases
(1) A load arrangement identifies the position, magnitude and direction of a free action.
(2) A load case identifies compatible load arrangements, sets of deformations and imperfections
considered for a particular verification.
(3) Detailed rules on load arrangements and load cases are given in EBCS 1 -"Basis of Design and'
Actions on Structures"
(4) The following simplifying assumptions may be made for computing load-effects in frames due to
gravity loading:
(a) The live load may be considered to be applied only to the floor or roof under consideration,
and the far ends of the columns may be assumed as fixed.
(b) Consideration may be limited to the following load cases:
(i) Design dead load on all spans with full design live load on two adjacent spans.
(ii) Design dead load on all spans with full design live load on alternate spans.
3.7.3 Imperfections
(1) In the Ultimate Limit State, consideration shall be given to the effects of possible imperfections
in the geometry of the unloaded structure. Where significant, any possible unfavorable effect of such
imperfections shall be taken into account.
(2) Individual sections shall be designed for the internal forces and moments arising from global
analysis, combining effects of actions and imperfections of the structure as a whole. .
(3) In the absence of other provisions, the effects of imperfections may be assessed by assuming that
the structure is inclined to the vertical at an angle ct> defined by: .
24 EBCS 2 -::J"
",.",,-
"
.;'
(a) For single storey frames or for structures loaded mainly at the top '..'
r ..1
'" tan,l. -
(3 11) ~;f~;:j -:-- -150 .
(b) For other types of frames
1
tan<tl = 200 (3.12)
(4) Where the effects of imperfections are smaller than the effects of design horizontal actions, their
influence may be ignored. Imperfections need not be considered in accidental combinations of actions.
3.7.4 Time Dependent Effects
(1) Time dependent effects shall be taken into account where significant.
(2) Creep and shrinkage normally need only be considered for the Serviceability Limit State except
where their influence on second-order effects are likely to be significant.
3.7.S Idealization of the Structure
(1) The elements of a structure are normally classified, by consideration of their nature and function,
as beams, columns, slabs, walls, plates, arches, shells, etc. Rules are provided for the analysis of the
commoner of these elements and of structures consisting of combinations of these elements.
(2) To be considered as a beam or a column, the span or length of the member shall not be less than
twice the overall section depth. A beam whose span is less than twice its depth is considered as a deep
.beam.
(3) To be considered as a slab, the minimum span shall not be less than four times the overall slab
thickness.
(4) A slab subjected to predominantly uniformly distributed loads may be considered to be one-way
spanning if either:
(a) it possess two free (unsupported) and sensibly parallel edges, or
(b) if it is the central part of a sensibly rectangular slab supported on four edges with a ratio of
the longer to shorter span greater than 2.
(5) Ribbed or waffle slabs may be treated as solid slabs for the purposes of analysis, provided that
the flange of structural topping and transverse ribs have sufficient torsional stiff'ness. This may be
assumed provided:
(a) The rib spacing does not exceed 1.5 m.
(b) The depth of the rib below the flange does not exceed four times its width.
(c) The depth of the flange is at least 1/10 of the clear distance between ribs or 50 mm,
whichever is greater.
(d) Transverse ribs are provided at a clear spacing not exceeding 10 times the overall depth of
the slab.
The minimum flange thickness of 50 mm may he redul:ed to 40 mm where permanent hlol:ks
!. are incorporated between the ribs.
EBCS 2 -1995 25
.
~---'~!J
jr--l
I
;
(6) A wall shall have a horizontal length of at least four times its thickness. Otherwise it shall be
treated as a column.
3.7.6 Stiffness
(1) Any reasonable assumptions may be adopted for computing the relative flexural. and torsional
stiffness of members. The assumptions made shall be consistent throughout the analysis.
,
3.7.7 Effective Span Length
(1) The effective span of a simply supported member shall be taken as the lower of the following two
values:
(a) The distance between the center lines of the supports.
(b) The clear distance between the faces of the supports plus the effective depth.
(2) The effective span of a continuous element shall normally be taken as the distance between the
center lines of the supports.
(3) For a cantilever, the effective span is taken to be its length, measured from:
(a) The face of the supports, for an isolated, fixed-ended cantilever.
(b) The center line of the support for a cantilever which forms the end of a continuous beam.
3.7.8 Effective Flange Width for T- Beams and L-Beams
(1) In the absence of a more accurate determination, the effective width to be used to obtain the load-
effects for a given span of a symmetrical T -beam shall not exceed the lesser of:
(a) The thickness of the web plus one-fifth of the effective span, or
(b) The actual width of the top slab (extending between the centers of the adjacent spans).
(2) The effective width shall be taken as constant over the entire span, including the parts near
intermediate supports for continuous beams.
(3) For edge beams (L-beams), the effective width shall not exceed the lesser of:
(a) The thickness of the web plus one-tenth of the effective span
(b) The thickness of the web plus half the clear distance to the adjacent beam.
3.7.9 Redistribution of Moments
(1) Moments obtained from a linear analysis may be reduced by multiplying by the following
reduction coefficient c5 provided that the moments are increased in other sections in order to maintain
equilibrium.
26 EBCS 2 -1995 .._1'-
;~~III-
1
"
CHAPTER 3: BASIS OF DESIGN r'
-i -
(2) For continuous beams and for beams in rigid jointed braced frames with span/effective-depth ratio )
not greater than 20, ,}
x !
0 .0.44 + 1.25(d) (3.13)
The neutral axis height, x, is calculated at the ultimate limit state and the term x/d refers to
the section where the moment is reduced.
(3) For other continuous beams and rigid jointed braced frames
0 ~ 0.75 (3.14)
(4) For sway frames with slenderness ratio).. of columns less than 25
0 ~ 0.90 (3.15)
3.7.10 Second-Qrder Effects
(1) Second-order effects shall be taken into account where they may significantly affect the overall
stability of a structure or the attainment of the ultimate limit state at critical sections.
(2) For normal buildings, second-order effects may be neglected where they increase the moments,
calculated ignoring displacements, by not more than 10%.
3.8 ANALYSIS AND DESIGN OF PLANE ELEMENTS
3.8.1 Slabs
3.8.1.1 Methods of Analysis
(1) Moments and internal shear forces may be determined on the basis of the following types of
analysis:
(a) Linear analysis, optionally followed by redistribution
(b) Plastic analysis
(c) Non-linear analysis
3.8.1.2 Linear Alwlysis, with or without Redistribution
(1) The linear analysis shall be based generally on the gross cross-sections by adopting for Poisson's
ratio a value ~etween 0 and 0.2.
(2) Linear analysis is valid for the Serviceability Limit States and for the Ultimate Limit States.
(3) If required, the support moments in continuous slabs. resulting from a linear analysis may be
-reduced by not more than 25 %, for an appropriate width, provided that the corresponding average
moments for the s:}Ine width at midspan, are adjusted to satisfy equilibrium, provided further that the
provisions of Section 3.7.9 (1) and (2) are complied with.
(4) Appendix A, which is based on linear analysis with redistribution, may be used for the analysis
of two-way slabs. No further redistribution is, however, allowed..
~~;i~ EBCS 2 -1995 27
.c,$-,-
"t
..00.-
~
":'Cc
c ,
.'
:;; j
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE !
: .
3.8.1.3 Plastic Analysis
(1) In general, plastic analysis is only applicable to the ultimate limit states. Both static (e.g., the ~
strip method) and dynamic (e.g., yield line theory) methods may be used.
(2) The following conditions shall be satisfied:
, (a) When using plastic analysis, the area of tensile reinforcement shall not exceed, at any point
or in any direction a value corresponding to x/d = 0.25.
(b) If a static method is used, the moment distribution selected shall not differ substantially from
the elastic moment distribution.
(c) If a dynamic method is used, the ratio of the support moments to the mid-span moments shall
normally be not less than 0.5, nor more than 2.
3.8.2 Flat Slabs
3.8.2.1 Definition
(1) The term flat slabs or plate means a reinforced concrete slab with or without drops and supported,
generally without beams, by columns with or without flared column heads.
3.8.2.2 Method of Analysis
(1) The forces acting in the middle plane of a plate can be determined on the basis of any of the
following types of analysis: .
(a) Linear Analysis
(b) Plastic Analysis .
(c) Non-linear Analysis
(2) The empirical method or the equivalent frame method given in Appendix A may be used for the
analysis of flat slabs and two-way slab systems.
28 EBCS 2 -1995 -
r- ..,--
.CHAPTER 4
, ULTIMATE LIMIT STATES
4.1 SCOPE
(1) Th~~ c?apter gives. methods of analysis an~ desi~ o~ linear elements that in general ensure .that r~;
the objectives set out m Chapter 3 for the Ultimate LImit State are met. ' :'l,i
" c,;':',
(2) Other meth~s may be used provided they can be shown to be satisfactory tor the type of structure \~
or member considered. It)\t tt
(3) It is assumed that the ultimate limit state is the critical limit state. t'
4.2 BASIS OF DF$IGN I'
4.2.1 Analysis of Sections .j
.I "
(1) The calc~ation of the. ulti~ate r~i.stance of me~bers. for fl~xure and axial loads shall be based :
on the followmg assumptions, to addition to those gIven to SectiOns 3.7 and 3.8. ,
(a) Plane sections remain plane iJ
(b) The reinforcememis subjected to the same variations in strain as the adjacent concrete :!f t
(c) The tensile strength of the concrete is neglected '~
.(d) The maximum compressive strain in the concrete is taken to be:
I"
0.0035 in bending (simple or compound) ,
.0.002 in axial compression ,..
(e) The maximum tensile strain in the reinforcement is taken to be 0.01. :
.,
.,
4.2.2 Strain Distribution :;
(1) Referring to Fig. 4.1, the strain diagram shaii be assumed to pass through one of the three points
A, B or C.
4.2.3 Idealized Stress-Strain Diagram for Concrete
4.2.3.1 Parabolic-Rectangular Diagram
(1) The parabolic-rectanglar stress distribution shown in Fig. 4.2 may be used for calculation of
section capacity.
4.2.3.2 Rectanglar Diagram
(1) For sections which are partly in tension (beams or columns with large eccentricity), the simplified
rectangular stress block shown in Fig. 4.3 may be used.
4.2.4 Stress-Strain Diagram for Steel
(1) The elasto-plastic diagram shown in Fig. 4.4 may be used for oroinary steel.
, EBCS 2 -1995 29
.\
I .
W"
':It !
""
'"
..,
0.01
T T .~
h d
,
.,
8 8 8
C
0 -0.002
Figure 4.1 Strain Diagram in the Ultimate Limit State
fc
Ideallz8d Olagram-,--
.., fCk
1 ,
,-- I I
..'" I I
".J I
",'" _O811~n DIagram I
'" I I
,," I I
I I I
I I 0.67f.k I
I I fcd = -I
I I Y. I
I I
I I
I I
I, I .
/ '_fc .1000 Ec (12eo Ec-l) fCd far Ec' 0.002
I I
I I
, E .
c
-0.001 -0.002 -o.oo!e
Figure 4.2 Parabolic-Rectanglar Stress-Strain Diagram for Concrete in Compression
E fCd = O.85fck/ Yc
T I' o.ex Fc
-L
I d
h I
1 ic
.~.-- F
E '
s
Figure 4.3 Rectangular Stress Diagram
..&.
30 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
--~
.
CHAPTER 4: Ui TIMA TE LIMIT STATES
-
f.
,
E
0.01 .
Figure 4.4 Stress-Strain Diagram for Reinforcing Steel
4.3 FLEXURAL MEMBERS
.4.3.1 General
(1) Compression reinforcement in conjunction with additional tension reinforcement may be used to
increase the strength of flexural members.
(2) In the analysis of a cross-section of a beam which has to resist a small axial load, the effect of the
ultimate axial load may be ignored if the axial load does not exceed 0.1!ck times the cross-sectional
area.
.
(3) Design of deep beams shall be in accordance with Section 6.3.
.4.3.2 Distance Between Lateral Supports of Flexural Members
(1) The spacing of lateral supports for a beam shall not exceed 50 times the least width of the
compression flange or face. Effects of lateral eccentricity of load shall be taken in determining the
spacing of lateral supports.
4.4 COMPRESSION MEMBERS
4.4.1 Scope and Definition
(I) This section refers to slender structures or slender members mainly subjected to compression
whose load carrying capacity is significantly influenced by their deformations (second-order effects).
(2) The principles given in this section apply to linear reinforced concrete members subjected to axial
compression, with or without bending, for which the effects of torsion can be neglected.
(3) These principles may also be applied to other types of structural member, such as walls, shells,
slender beams in which lateral buckling of the compre,.~sion zone may occur, deep beams or other
-exceptil)nal ~tructures or members in which significant local deformations may arise.
(4) In compre~~ion members, the influence of second-()rder eft"ects shall be considered if the increase
-ahl)'..e th~ tir~t-order bending moments due to deflections exceeds 10%.
EBCS 2. 7995 31
v-
,
i
4.4.2. Analysis and ~ign Procedures ~
(1) The internal forces and moments may generally be determined by elastic global analysis using
either: -
(a) First-order theory, using the initial geometry of the structure, or
(b) Second-order theory~ taking into. account the influence of the deformation of the stfl'cture.
(2) First-order theory may be us.ed for the global analysis in the following cases:
(a) Non-sway frames (Section. 4.4.4.2)
(b) Braced frames (Section 4;4.4.3)
(c) Design methods which make indirect allow?nces for second-order effects.
(3) Second-order theory may be used for the global analysis in all cases.
(4) Design for structural stability taking account of second-order effects shall ensure that, for the most
unfavorable combinations of actions at the ultimate limit state, loss of static equilibrium (locally or
for the structure as a whole) does not occur or the resistance of individual cross-sections subjected
to bending and longitudinal force is not exceeded.
(5) The structural behavior shall be considered in any direction in which failure due to second-order
effects may occur.
4.4.3 Allowance for Imperfections
(1) Allowance shall be made for the uncertainties associated with the prediction of second-order -
effects and, in particular, dimensional inaccuracies and uncertainties in the position and line of action
of the axial loads.
.
(2) Suitable equivalent geometric imperfections may be used, with values which reflect the possible
effects of all types of imperfection.
(3) For frame structures the effects of imperfections may be allowed for in frame analysis by means
of an equivalent geometric imperfection in the form of an initial sway imperfection <P determined in
accordance with Section 3.7.3.
I (4) For isolated elements, the equivalent geometric imperfections may be introduced by increasingI
the eccentricity of the longitudinal force by an additional eccentricity ea, acting in the mostI
unfavorable direction:
j L
e = --.:.- ~ 20 mm (4.1)
a 300
where Le denotes the effective length of the isolated element (see Section 4.4.7).
32 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
';
,
,
;
CHAP-TER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STATES
4.4.4 Classification of Structur~ and Structural Elements
..4.4.4.1 General
(I) For the purpose of design calculations, structures or structural members may be classified as
braced or unbraced depending on the provision or not of bracing elements and as sway or non-sway
depending on their sensitivity to second-order effects due to lateral displacements. :
I
(2) Similarly, isolated columns are classified as slender or non-slender.
4.4.4.2 Sway or Non-Sway Structures
(1) A frame may be classified as non-sway if its response to in-plane horizontal forces is sufficiently j
stiff for it to be acceptably accurate to neglect any additional internal forces or moments arising from ;
horizontal displacements of its nodes.
(2) Any other frame shall be classified as a sway frame and the effects of the horizontal displacements
of its nodes shall be taken into account in its design (see Section 4.4.2).
(3) A frame may be classified as non-sway for a given load case if the critical load ratio NSd/Ncr for
that load case satisfies the criterion:
NSd~Ncr ~ 0.1 (4.2)
where Nsd is the design value of the total vertical load
..Ncr is its critical value for failure in a sway mode (see Section 4.4.12).
.(4) Beam-and-column type plane frames in building structures with beams connecting each column
at each story level may be classified as non-sway for a given load case, when first-order theory is
used, the horizontal displacements in each story due to the design loads (both horizontal and vertical),
plus the initial sway imperfection (see Section 4.4.3) satisfy the criterion of Eq. 4.3.
No
"HI ~ C.1 (4.3)
,Ii)j
,.c; ..
I where
0 is the horizontal displacement at the top of the story, relative to the bottom of the story
(see (5) below) -
L is the story height
H is the total horizontal reaction at the bottom of the story
N is the total vertical reaction at the bottom of the story.
(5) The displacement 0 in (4) above shall be determined using stiffness values for beams and columns
corresponding to the ultimate limit state. As an approximation, displacements calculated using moment
of inertia of the gross section may be multiplied by the ratio of the gross column stiffness to the
effective column stiffness in Section 4.4.12 to obtain o.
-.
(6) For sway frames, the requirements for frame stability given in Section 4.4.8 shall also be
satisfied.
EBCS 2 -1995 33
I
I
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONC,qETE .
4.4.4.3 Braced or Unbraced StrudureS' .
(1) A frame may be classified as braced if its sway 'resistance is supplied by a bracing system with,
a response to in-plane horizontal loads which is ,sufficiently stiff for it, to be acceptably accurate to
assume that all horizontal loads are resisted by the bracing system. This may be assumed to be the
case ,if the frame attracts not more than 10% of the horizontal loads.
,
(2) A braced frame may be treated as fully supported laterally.
(3) The effects of the initial sway imperfections (see Section 4.4.3(3)) in the braced frame shall be
taken into account in the design of the bracing system.
(4) The initiallway imperfections (or the equivalent horizontal forces), plus any horizontal loads
applied to a braced fr~e, may be treated as affecting only the bracing system.
(5) The bracing system shall be designed to resist:
(a) Any horizontal loads applied to the frames which it braceS.
(b) Any horizontal or vertical loads applied directly to the bracing system.
(c) The effects of the initial sway imperfections (or the equivalent horizontal forces) from the
bracing system itself and from all the frames which it braces.
,(6) Where the bracing system is a frame or sub-frame, it may itself be either sway or non-sway (see
Section 4.4.4.2.)
(7) When applying the criterion given in Section 4.4.4.2(3) to a frame or sub-ftame acting as a ..
bracing system, the total vertical load acting an all the frames whi~h it braces shall also be included.
.
(8) When applying the \:riterion given in Section 4:4.4.2(4) to a frame or sub-frame acting as a
bracing system, the total horizo,ntal and vertical load acting on all the frames which it braces shall also
be included, plus the initial sway imperfection app~ied in the form of the equivalent horizontal forces
from the bracing system itself and from all the frames which it braces.
4.4.4.4 Isolated Columns
(1) Columns may be considered as isolated columns when they are isolated compr~sion members
(such as individual isolated columns and columns with articulations in a non-sway structure), or
CQ~pression members which are integral parts of a structure but which are considered to be 'isolated
for design purposes (such as slender bracing elements considered as isolated columns, and columns
with restrained ends in a non-sway structure).
4.4.5 Dennition of Slenderness Ratio
'(1) For isolated columns. the slenderness ratio is defined by:
L
). .T (4.4) .
.where L. is the effective buckling length
i is the p'1nimum radius of gyration of the concrete section only.
l4 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994 -
, ,'"',
-CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES
,!
y{
(2) For multistory sway frames comprising rectangular subframes, the following expression may be
,c, -Used to calculate the slenderness ratio of the columns in the same story: ' ('.
,;"
f* ,j 12A .(4.5) :,'111.-
~ ."
'" XL '1
, "
'tti
where A is the sum of the cross-sectional areas of all the columns of the stot>: ~,I
K, is the total lateral stiffnas of the columna of the story (story riJidity), with nmulus '
i t: of elasticity taken as unity ,[I.
L is the story height ',;
.i
.
~,,:\
4.4.6 Limits of Slendern~ ,'~
(1) The slenderness ratio of concrete columns shall not exceed 140 'I
(2) Second-order effects in compressive members need not be taken into account in the following
cases:
(a) For sway frames, the greater of Eq. 4.6a or 4.6b
). ~ 25 (4.6a)
15
). ~ -(4.6b)
..r;:
.
(b) For non-sway frames
). ~' 50 -25~ (4.7)
(MJ ~
.!
where M1 and M2 are the first-order (calculated) moments at the ends, M2 being always positive t
and greater in magnitude than Ml' and M] being positive if member is bent in f
single curvature and negative if bent in double curvature k
JI d = N ../f ..,;.tc ~
4.4.7 Effective Buckling Length of Compression Members ,
j
(1) The effective buckling length L, of a column in a given plane may be obtained from the following !
approximate equa:tions provided the restriction in (3) below is complied with:
(a) Non-sway mode ~
~ .~~~ ~ 0.7 (4.8) j
-L a + 0.8
.
EBCS 2 -1996 3S
.
;..,--
~ (b) Sway mode .
j L. 7.5 + 4(aJ + az) + 1.6aJaz
(49 ) -.~ 1.15 .
.L 7.5 + aJ + az
.
i or conservatively
r;:!, L
~~:,~', -!. ./i-:-O~- ~ 1.15 (4.10)
~~~ cry L
"
, (2) For the theoretical model shown in Fig. 4.5, the stiffness coefficients al and a2 are obtained from
.
,~ K + K
a I c
I .K + K (4.11)
II 12
~ + Kc
: a2 .~I + ~ (4.12)
a +a
aWl --~--r (4.13)
where KI and K2 are column stiffness coefficients (EI/L)
Kc is the stiffness coefficient (EIIL) of the column being designed
Kij is the effective beam stiffness coefficient (EIIL)
= 1.0 opposite end elastically or rigidly restrained
= 0.5 opposite end free to rotate
= 0 for a cantilever beam .
Ib I EXAMPLE
Lb.
Calculation of aA in A
I.JIL.J + IcJlLcJ
a =
A IbIILbI + O.5IblIL.1
Ib3 ~4 for E- = constant
~gure 4.5 Model for Computation of Stiffness Coefficient
(3) The above approximate equations for effective length calculation are applicable for values of al
or a2 not exceeding 10. For higher values more accurate methods must be used.
36 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
" '""::\~-"-"-'"-"~-"-~~--~ -t. ;'
, ,
': c,:~
CHAPTER 4: uL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES
!!." ,
\
~ (4) When calculating a, only members properly framed into the end of the column in the appropriate;'
plane of bending shall be considered. The stiffneSs of each member shall be obtained by dividing-the 1(['.
-second moment of area of its concrete section by its actual length. ;!i
1\fl,
(5) When the connection between a column and its base is not designed to resist other than nominal
i~~ moment a at such positions shall be taken as 10. If a base is designed to resist the column moment, "..~
a may be taken as 1.0. i
c,i
",, 1
'if '
(6) For flats sla~ construction, an ,eQuivalent beam shall be taken as having the width and thickness ~
of the 5lab formmg the column strip. 'tl
It
4 4 8 .1.9/ ..Frame stabl Ity i'.
',I'
1
4.4.8.1 General -:
(1) All frames shall have adequate resistance to failure in a sway mode, (see Section 4.4.11).
However, where the frame is shown tq be a non-sway frame (see Section 4.4.4.2), no further sway
mode verification is required.
(2) All frames mcluding sway frames shall also be checked for adequate resistance to failure in non-
sway modes (see Section 4.4.9).
4.4.8.2 An.alysis of Sway Frames
"
(1) When global analysis is used, the second-order effects in the sway mode shall be included, either
I'
~ directly by using second-order elastic analysis, or indirectly by using first-order analysis with i
amplified sway moments (see Section 4.4.11).
"
...
-(2) When second-order elastic global analysis is used, the resulting forces and moments may directly i
be used for member desi gn., ,:
Ii
(3) When first-order elastic analysis, with second-order moments is used for column design, the sway i
moments in the ?eaIns and the bearn-to-column co~ections shall be amplified by at least 1.2 unless I
a smaller value IS shown to be adequate by analysIs. ~
~
~
4.4.9 Design of Non-Sway Fram~ i
t\
'"
(1) .Individual n?n-sway compression members shall be considered to be isolated elements and be 1
designed accordmgly. ~
,I
P
t
(2) Bracing elements, or in non-sway frames without bracing elements, the individual compression I!
members shall be designed for the relevant horizontal forces and vertical loads taking account of the
I!
equivalent geometric imperfections defined in Section 3.7.3 and 4.4.3, respectively.
i
(3) For individual compression members, the design rules for isolated columns (Section 4.4.10) apply.
The effective buckling length L, may generally be determined according to Section 4.4.7.
.;
,
, EBCS 2 -1995 37
j
.
!
0-
I-
I
-
~.4.10 Delip or Isolated Columl18
4.4.10.1 GtMrul
(1) For buildings, a design method may be used which assum~ die compression membeR to be
isolated and adopts a simplified shape for the deformed axis of die column. The additional
eccentricity induced in the column by its deflection is then calculated as a function of Ilei1d~
ratio.
,
4.4.10.2 TotGl eccentricity
(1) The total eccentricity to be used for the desian of columns of constant cross-aection at the critical
section is given by:
e. = e. + eG +e2 (4.14)
w,hece e, is equivalent constant first-order eccentricity of the desi&n axial load, see (2) and (3)
below
eG is the additional eccentricity according to Eq 4.1
e2 is the second-order eccentricity (Section 4.4.10.3).
(2) For first-order eccentricity eo equal at both ends of a column,
e. = eo (4.15)
(3) For first-order moments varying linearly along the lenith, the equivalent eccentricity is the higher
of the fo"owin~ two values:
e, ~ 0.6t112 + O.4eOI (4.16a)
e. = 0.4e112 (4.16b)
where eol and el12 are the first-order eccentricities at the ends, el12 being positive and greater in
magnitude than eol.
(4) For different eccentricities at the ends, (3) above, the critical end section shall be checked for
first-order moments:
e~ = el12 + eQ (4.17'\
4.4.10.3 Second-Order Eccentricity
(1) For non-sway frames, the second-order eccentricity e2 of an isolated column may be obtained as
k L2
e z ~ (1/,) (4.18)
2 10
1 where L, is the effective buckling length of the column
kl = X/20 -0.75 for 15 ~ A ~ 35
kl = 1.0 for A > 35
~ 1/, is the curvature at the critical section, see (2) below.
.
38 EBCS 2: Part 7 -7994
.
1
l~
CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlMff STA TES
,
I
(2) The curvature is generally a non-linear function of the axial load and bending moment in the
critical section, but the following approximate value may be used in the absence of more accurate
methods:
! -~(~) 10-3 (4.19)
r d
where d is the column dimension in the buckling plane less the cover to the center of the
longitudinal reinforcement
kz = MjM...,
M" is the design moment at the critical section including second-order effects
M..., is the balanced moment capacity of the column.
(3) The appropriate value of kz may be found iteratively taking an initial value corresponding to first-
order actions.
'4.4.11 Amplified Sway Moments ,Method/or Sway Frames
(1) In the amplified sway moments method, the sway moments found by a first-order analysis shall
be increased by multiplying them by the moment magnification factor:
1
0 -(4.20)
1 1 -No.. IN
..cr
where NS4 is the design value of the total vertical load
.Nor is its critical value for failure in a sway mode.
(2) The amplified sway moments method shall not be used when the critical load ratio NsJNc, is more
.than 0.25.
(3) Sway moments are those associated with the horizontal translation of the top of a story relative
to the bottom of that story. They arise from horizontal loading and may also arise from vertical
loading if either the structure or the loading is asymmetrical.
(4) As an alternative to determining NS4 INc, direct, the following approximation may be used in beam-
and-column tyPe frames as described in 4.4.4.2(4):
~ -~ (4.21)
N HL
c'
where 0, L, H and N are as defined 4.4.4.2(4).
(5) In the presence of torsional eccentricity in any floor of a structure, unless more accurate methods
are used, the sway moments due to torsion should be increased by multiplying them by the larger
moment magnification factor 01 obtained for the two orthogonal directions of the lateral loads acting
on the structure.
.
-
EBCS 2. 7995 39
.ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
..
..4.U Dlt41'i11iMdon 01 StOl)' Buckling Load N.
(1) Unless more accurate methods are used, the buckling load of a story may be assumed to be equal
to that of the substitute b~-column frame defined in Fig 4.6 and may be determined as:
rEI,
N., .U (4.22)
,
,
where EI, is the effective stiffness of the substitute column designed in accordance with (4)
below
L, is the effective length
(2) In lieu of a more accurate determination, the effective stiffness of a column EI, in Eq 4.22 may
be taken as:
EI, = 0.2E). + EI, (4.23)
where
E. = 1100/..1
E, is the modulus of elasticity of steel
I., I, are the moments of inertia of the concrete and reinforcement sections, respectively,
of the substitute column, with respect to the centroid of the concrete section (see
Fig 4.6(c.
or alternatively
M
EI. ...~ 0.4E I (4.24)
, (l/r...) ...
where M... is the balanced moment capacity of the substitute column
(l/r..,,) is the curvature at balanced load and may be taken as
~ .(~) 10-3 (4.25)
r... d
(3) In Eq 4.22 L, may be determined in accordance with Section 4.4.7 using the stiffness properties
of the gross concrete section for both beams and columns of the substitute frame (Fig. 4.6(b.
(4) The equivalent reinforcement areas, A,%l' in the substitute column (see Fig. 4.6(c to be used for
calculating I, and M... in (2) above may be obtained by designing the substitute column at each floor
level to carry the story design axial load and amplified sway moment at the critical section (see
Section 4.4.11). The equivalent column dimensions of the substitute column may be taken as shown
in Fig. 4.6(c), in the case of rectangular columns. Circular columns may be replaced by square
columns of the same cross-sectional area. In the above, concrete cover and bar arrar.gement in the
substitute columns shall be taken to be the same as those of the actual columns.
(5) The amplified sway moment, to be used for the design of the substitute column (see (4) above),
may be found iteratively taking the first-order design moment in the substitute column as an initial
value. .
40 EBCS 2: Part 7 -7994 .
-
~ .2 I kb
kb and kc are baled 0
tkc Groll Concrete Settlor
tkc
EQuivalent Ground Bet
la) Actual f'rame (b) SUbltltutl Ilam-Column Framl fc
CalculatinG Efflc11VI LenO1hl.
~ h "
~
\EJ " b \ A.,tat
-l..
d '
~-.!--\ "
(C) Crall -SIc110n of Substitute !,;
Column for CalculatinG Elc
and Mbal.
Figure 4.6 Substitute Multi~Story Beam-Column Frame
.(6) In lieu of more accurate determination, the first-order design moment, Mdl' at the critical section
of the substitute column may be determined using Eq. 4.26.
!:X2 + 3
-Mdl .HL (4.26) 1.
!:Xl + !:X2 + 6 i~
~
where !:XI and a" are defined in Section 4.4.7 and shall not exceed 10. ~
j'
4.4.13 Effect or Creep :;
:
);
J,
(1) Cree~ effects ma~ b~ ignored if the increase in the first-order bending moments due to creep i
deformation and longitudinal force does not exceed 10%. ..
(2) In non-sway buildings, creep deformation of slender compression members connected ~
monolithically to slabs or beams at their two ends may normally be disregarded because their effects :
are generally compensated by other influences which are neglected in the design. In interior columns, i
the restraints at the column ends reduce the creep deformations significantly so that they can be ."
neglected. In edge columns with different eccentricities at each end, creep increases the deformations
but it does not decrease the bearing capacity because these deformations are not additional.to the
critical column deflections in the relevant failure state. '
-(3) For isolated columns in non-sway structures, creep may be allowed for by multj~y!ng the
curvature for short-term loads (Eq. 4.19) by (1 + ~.J, where ~d is the ratio of dead loaiJ ae.~ign
moment to total design moment, always taken as positive.
EBCS 2. 1995 41
.
.
-
(4) For sway frames, the effective column stiffness (Eq. 4.23 or 4.24) may be divided by (1 + .aJ, .
where .ad is as in (3) above.
4.4.14 Slender Columns Bent About the Major Axis .
(1) A slender column bent about its major axis may be treated as biaxially loaded with initial
eccentricity e" acting about the minor axis.
4,4.15 Biaxial Bending of Columns
4.4.15.1 Smoll Ratios of Relative Eccentricity
(1) Columns of rectangular cross-section which are subjected to biaxial bending may be checked
separately for uniaxial bending in each respective dircction provided the relative eccentricities are ~uch
that k S 0.2; where k denotes the ratio of the smaller relative eccentricity to the larger relative
eccentricity .
(2) The relative eccentricity, for a given direction, is defined as the ratio of the total eccentricity,
allowing for initial eccentricity and second-order effects in that direction, to the column width in the
same direction.
4.4.15.2 Overlapping Buckling Curves
(1) Separate checks as in Section 4.4.15.1 is equally applicable to biaxial bending in general, provided
the central one-third parts of the effective lengths of the buckled column in the principal directions
do not overlap (see Fig. 4.7). .
I ,
T / '
I \
I \ ..
I \--~ -;- L
I I -.or.
IT ,)--1- ~
LOI :JL '
\~
\
\
\
\
\
,
\
,
\.
F1lUre 4.7 Buckling Curv~ for Bending in each of the Two Principal Directions
4.4.15.3 Approximate Method
(1) If neither of the conditions in Sections 4.4.15.1 and 4.4.15.2 is satisfied, then the approximate
method of calculation given in this section may be adopted, in the absence of more accurate methods.
42 EBCS 2: p." 1 -1994
.
" "
CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlMIT,STA TES
,
.('2) For'this approximate method, one-fourth of the total reinforcement must either be distributed
Ilona"each t:aceof the ~lumn or at each corner. The column shall be d~igned for uniaxial bending
with the followina equivalent uniaxial eccentricity of load, eo,' along the axis parallel to the larger
A relative eccentricity:
e .e (1 + ka) (4.27)
0' kJt
where t. denotes the total eccentricity in the direction of the larger relative eccentricity
k denotes the relative eccentricity ratio defined in Section 4.4.15.1(2)
a may be obtained from Table 4.1 as a function of the relative normal force JI = N./(f..,..ot) f\;;,
I~
Table 4.1 Values or Factor a t~
,!I
II! 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 ~ 1.0!~
, ...it
a 0.6 0.8 0.9 0.7 0.6 0.5 I~
')
4.5 SHEAR r
"
..,~
" ,
4.5.1 General ~
!c
;
(1) This Section applies to beams and slabs designed for flexure in accordance with Section 4.3. It j
also applies to columns subjected to significant shear forces designed in accordance with Sections 4.3 f
and 4.4. I
'i
(2) Provisions for minimum shear reinforcement are given in Chapter 7. j
.(3) The ultimate limit state in shear is characterised by either diagonal compression failure of the f,
concrete or failure of the web reinforcement due to diagonal tension. ..
t ':
.(4) Resistance to diagonal tension is obtained as the sum of the resistances of the web reinforcement :,}
and of the concrete section. !:
.t
..
.I
(5) Critical section for shear is at a distance d from the face of supports. Sections closer than d shall ~
be designed for the shear at d. I
~
,
(6) Two-way action (punching) shall be considered according to Section 4.10. i
I
:{
4.5.2 Limiting Value or Ultimate Shear Force .4
,
\
I
(1) In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in the concrete, the shear resistance VRd of a i
section given by Eq. 4.28 shall not be less than the applied shear force V.. i
;;
,\
VRd = 0.25!clJ,.d (4.28) I;
!!
where b", is the minimum width of the web. r
11
"
')
EBCS 2 -1995 43
.
4.5.3 Shear Resistance of Concrete in Beams and Slabs
~
4.5.3.1 Members Without Significant Axial Forces
(1) The shear force Vc carried by the concrete in members without significant axial forces shall be
taken as:
, Vc -0.25fcld klk2bwd (4.29)
where
k1 = (1 + 50p) ~ 2.0
~ = 1.6 -d ~ 1.0 (d in meters). For members where more than 50% of the bottom
reinforcement is curtailed, ~ = 1
p = A/b..d
A. is the area of the tensile reinforcement anchored beyond the intersection of the steel
and the line of a possible 450 crack starting from the edge of the section (see Fig.
4.8)
I
b t Ib,net A
/ section considered
r'=!!.:, V sd r=~ V sd s
d [
j~::~1~~:::;;;~;~i;;~15 ~ ~ 4 5 / ~ .'] d
As As ~ -
.-.
.
Figure 4.8 A, to be introduced in Eq. 4.29
4.5.3.2 Members Subjected to Significant Axial CompressionI
(1) For members subjected to axial compression, Eq. 4.30 may be used to compute the additionalI
shear force Vc" carried by the concrete.I
4 V .O.IO~N (4.30)
CPO A S,t
c
where NS,t is the design axial force
4.5.3.3 Members Subjected to Axial Tension
(1) For members subjected to axial tension, shear reinforcement shall be designed to carry total shear.
(2) In the case of fatigue loading, the shear reinforcement shall carry the total shear. .....
j 44 EBCS 2: Part 7 .7994 ...
CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LlM" S1 A rES
-4.5.4 Design of Shear Reinforcement
(1) In beams, bent-up bars shall not be used u shear reinforcements except in combination with
stirrups. At least 50% of the design shear force ~S4 shall be resisted by vertiCal stirrups.
(2) WJlere inclined shear reinforcement is used, the angle between the reinforcement and the
longitudinal axis of the beam shall not be less than 45.
(3) Where the load is not acting at the top of the beam or when .the support is not at the bottom of
the beam suspension reinforcement shall be provided to transfer the load to the top of the beam.
(4) When shear reinforcement perpendicular to the longitudinal axis is used, its shear resistance V,
may be calculated as:
V = ~ (4.31)
.s
where A. is the area of shear reinforcement within distance s.
(5) When inclined stirrups are used, the shear resistance of the stirrups may be calculated as:
V = A.dfyd(sina + cosa) (4.32)
.s
..
where a is the angle of inclination from the horizontal.
(6) When shear reinforcement consists of a single bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up
at the same distance from the support, the shear resistance of the reinforcement may be calculated as:
V. = A.fyd sina (4.33)
4.5.5 Web-Flange Connections
4.5.5.1 General
(1) The shear strength of the flange may be calculated considering th~ flange as a system of
compressive struts combined with ties in the form of tensile reinforcement.
(2) The junction of the flanges with the web shall be checked for longitudinal shear.
(3) The ultimate limit state in longitudinal shear is governed either by the effect of inclined flange
compression (acting parallel to its middle plane) or by tension in the transverse reinforcement.
(4) The longitudinal shear per unit length v..t, which may be obtained as a function of the applied
transverse shear V Sd from Eqs. 4.32 and 4.33, shall not exceed the limits of resistance given by
Eqs. 4.34 and 4.35.
",'i
!~
EBCS 2 -1995 45
-
(5) Calculation of longitudinal shear per unit length: -
(a) For flange in compression
b -b V '. .
V.oi = (' W)~ \4.34)
2b z
.
,
(P) for flange in tension
A -A V
V.oi = (' JW)~ (4.35)
2A z
,
I where b. is the effective width of aT-section
I .bw is the width of the web
.~::~",'~:'\""; Z is the internal lever arm
A, is the area of the longitudinal steel in the effective flanges outside the projection of
the web into the slab
AJW is the area of the longitudinal steel inside the slab within the projection of the web
into the slab.
4.5.52 Resistance to Inclined Compression
(1) The resistance to inclined compression per unit length VRdl shall be computed as
..
VRdI = O.25tdhl (4.36)'-
where hI is the total thickness of the flange. -
4.5.5.3 Resistance to Diagonal Tension
(1) The resistance to diagonal tension per unit length VRd2 shall be computed as
VRd2 = O.5fctd hI + (4.37)
1
where As! is the area of transverse reinforcement per unit length, perpendicular to the web.
flange interface (see Fig. 4.9)
(2) If, at the section with M = Mmax (see Fig 4.9), the flange is subjected to a tensile force, the
concrete contribution O.50tldhl in Eq. 4.37 should be neglected.
(3) The cross sectional area of the transverse flexural reinforcement which crosses the interface
between web and flange can be taken into account in calculating As!. If this reinforcement is not
sufficient as determined from Eq. 4.37, then additional reinforcement shall be provided.
I
.
46 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
I
CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES '~
;,
"
.'~
1
\
i
f
(
! .1
i
.: ..
~ .
,--
figure 4.9 Notations for Web-Flange Connections
(4) The reinforcement crossing the plane of the junction shall be:
.1. (a) Placed ~n the part of the flange subjected to tension by transverse bending if the latter is
,,' predommant.
t .(b) Evenly distributed between the upper and lower parts if the transverse bending is slight.
...~. 4.6 TORSION
;"
'J'f 4.6.1 Definitions
i
(I) Campa/ibiliry torsion. Torques which are due solely to the restraint of the angular rotatif1r.
induced by adjacent members.
(2) Equilibrium torsion. Torques which are necessary for equilihrium.
4.6.2 General
(I) Torques due to compatibility torsion are not necessary for equilihrium and may he negle<.:ted in
ultimate limit state calculations. However, the resulting secondary effe<.:ts shall he <.:()nsidered in the
serviceability limit states and in detailing.
(2) The torsional resistance of any section may be calculated on the ha.'iis of an equivalent h()ll()w
section with thin walls (see Fig 4.10).
(3) For T -sections and other sections which can be subdivided into rectangles, the torsi()nal resistan<.:e
may be taken as the sum of the capacities of the individual rectangular se<.:tions. The suhdivish)n ()f
the section may be chosen so as to maximize the calculate{! resistance (see Se<.:th)ns 4.6.3 and 4.6.4).
.EBCS 2 199~ ~7
.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OE CONCRETE
(4) For hollow sections, the equivalent wall thickness shall not exceed the actual wall thickness. .
Actual wall thickness fQr hollow sections that is less than twice the concrete cover to longitudinal bars
is not allowed.
(5) The equivalent hollow section has the same outer boundary as the actual section and an equivalent
thic~ess h., obtained as h.1 ~ A/u ~ the actual wall thickness (where u is the outer perimeter and
A is the total area of the cross-section enclosoo by the outer perimeter, including inner hollow areas).
(6) The critical section for torque is at the face of supports.
/", Centre Line
Perimeter u
h.,
.'
Figure 4.10 Equivalent Hollow Section
~
4.6.3 Limiting Value of Ultimate Torque
.
(1) In order to prevent diagonal compression failure in the concrete, the torsional resistance TRJ of
a section given by Eq. 4.38 shall not be less than the applied torque T sct.
TRJ = O.80/cdA'lh'l (4.38)
where A'I is the area enclosed within the centerline of the thin-wall cross-section including
inner hollow areas (see Section 4.6.2).
4.6.4 Torsional Resistance of Concrete '
i
,
(1) The torque Tc carried by the concrete shal.l be taken as:
Tc = 1.2/ctdA'lh'l (4.39)
4.6.5 Design of Torsional Reinforcement
(1) Torsional reinforcement in the torm of closed links and longitudinal reinforcement is required to
carry the excess torque whenever the applied torque ~xceeds the concrete resistance given by .
Eq.4.39.
(2) The volume of longitudinal torsional reinforcement shall be chosen to be equal to the volume of .
the links (closed stirrups).
48 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
.
CHAPTER 4: UL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES
.
(3) Minimum torsional reinforcement in the form of stirrups shall be provided as required in
.Chapter 7.
(4) The torsional resistance'ofthe reinforcement T~is given by Eqs. 4.40 and 4.41.
U.,/ AI
Tq --~~- (4.40)
or 2A~/yJA,
T.. ..u (4.41)
q
where AI is the cross-sectional area of the stirrups in the effective wall
A, is the cross-sectional area of the lon9itudinal reinforcement
u./ is the mean perimeter enclosing the area A" (see Fig.4.9).
(2) The longitudinal reinforcement may' be distributed evenly around the inside perimeter of the links
or concentrated in the corners where there shall always be at least one bar.
(3) Additional -requirements are given in Chapter 7.
4.6.6 Combined Action.Errects
4.6.6.1 Torsion and Bending and/or Longitudinal Stresses.
{1) The longitudinal reinforcement shall be determined separately for torsion acCGrding to Section
4.6.5 and for flexure and axial loads according to Chapter 4.
.
(2) The area of reinforcement furnished shall be the sum of the areas thus determined.
4.6.6.2 Torsion and Shear
(1) The limiting values of torsional and shear resistance shall be taken as the basic values from Eqs.
4.38 and 4.28, respectively multiplied by the following reduction factors .8, and .8..
(a) torsion
1
.8, -
F!,?i 54 tV U 2
1 + (TIT ) (4.42)
U 54
(b) shear .8. = 1
~ /T 1 + (~ )2 (4.43)
.V54/VU
" '(~
.,
','~
ii:
, i;~ EBCS 2 -1995 49
"
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE "
",,:..,!S~ (2) The torsional and shear resistance of the concrete shall be taken as the basic values fromEqs.4.~9
":,~~l1 and 4.29, respectively, multiplied by the reduction factors fJlc and fJ"c' .
"""~'::
c i 1
"".. ? (a) torsion fJ lc =
I,,; 1;"
,";1.);,", p:;;;jil V ,j, {",:-:"l., ' ".. 2 L ,'w 1 -c "Co, "" """ +
;,,'!,~c!'::';~f\ (T IT ) (4.44)
~'"'~~r"""', sa c
~.;.,:~,f;~ ' 1
I (b) shear fJvc =
I r;g;1 T
1 + (VIii-)2 (4.45)
I sa c
I 4.7 PUNCHING
I
4.7.1 General
(1) This section applies to the punching of slabs and footings that are provided with the necessary
flexural reinforcement.
(2) The following requirements supplement those of Section 4.5 which must be checked to ensure
adequate resistance for one-way action.
(3) The ultimate limit state in punching is characterised by the formation of a truncated punching cone
or pyramid around concentrated loads or reactions. -
4.7.2 Loaded Area
~
(1) The provisions of this section are appli~able to the following types of loaded area:
(a) Shape (d denotes the average effective depth of the slab or footing):
-rectangular, with perimeter not exceeding 11d and the ratio of length to breadth not
exceeding 2
-circular, with diameter not exceeding 3.5d
-any shape, with perimeter not exceeding 11d.
(b) The loaded area is not so close to other concentrated forces that their critical perimeters
intersect, nor in a zone subjected to significant shear forces of a different origin. .
(2) If the conditions in l(a) above are not satisfied for wall or rectangular column supports, the
critical redu~ed perimeters according to Fig. 4.11 shall be taken into account, since the shear forces
in wall-shaped supports are concentrated in the corners.
4.7.3 Critical Section
(1) The critical section is perpendicular to the middle plane of the slab. It extends along the effective
depth d and its outline is defined below. .
SO EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994 .
~,
,"
.
.
r
-CHAPTER 4: (lL TIMA TE LIMIT STA TES f
," ,
b1i
-,
.-'~ '-'-. 2
{ ~ -I \ 8 .
.i. 1 8, ~ 2b t
1.5d1 W/////A Tn b 5.6d-b, :
.\ ~~~/////d i b,S{b .
'-. -.f _.~. b1 2.8d
!J. t:-!~~-.!.t 2 punching shear
~" ;,\ 2 8 >b 2
5!/;"!i"~
! F1gure 4.11 Applicitron- oTPuncltrng Provisions In Non-Standard Cas~
.
: ,4.7.3.1 Loaded Area Remote from an Opening or a Free -Edge
,
, J (1) The outline of the critical section is the closed outline of the minimum perimeter surrounding the
': .! loaded area. However, it need not approach closer to the loaded area than lines located at a distance
" ,
I 1.5d from that area and parallel to its boundaries (see Fig. 4.12).
1.5d 1.5d
,.
.
,
,
,
I
" t
..'" , .
~ """-~ ~ F1gure 4.12 Critical Section Remote. from a Free Edge
I 4.7.3.2 Loaded Area Qose to an Opening
(1) When openings in slabs and footings (see Fig. 4.13) are located at a distance less than 6d from
the edge of the concentrated load, then that part of .the perimeter which is enclosed by radial
projections from the centroid of the loaded area to the openings is considered ineffective.
(2) Where a single hole is adjacent to the column and its greatest width is less than one quarter of the
column side or one half of the slab depth, whichever1s the lesSer, its presence may be ignored.
4.7.3.3 Loaded Area Q'Ose to Free Edge
(1) In the vicinity of a free edge certain parts of the o\ltline defined for the case of remote opening
or free edge shall be repla~ed by perpendicular lines to those edges if the resulting length developed
.in this way, excl~ding the free edges, is smaller than the length of the closed outline wholly enclosing
the loaded area (see Fig. 4.14).
EBCS 2 -1995 51",i
.
i~:
.
.
t_- s 6d 'I.LI~L! I .
r J--, ,
C ' t ' I I 1 .5d :
rllCO
~ I n section ~ I I ,Op~in9
Loaded: ~ ~~ff8Ctive
.Area I 1 I I
I I
L J L L
For! > %
Replace l2 by '4~
Figure 4.13 Critical Section in the Vicinity of an Opening
_..:-_.1=~::~ F re e Ed ge
I I I
i I I
I I I
1
8 ' I
I I I
1.5d --i ~ 1.5d
~ L-- 1.5d
\ I '- ,
\ I , I
,/ '"
, " "
- "
-/"- ...
/---
1.5d
Figure 4.14 Critical Sections Near Free Edges -
4.7.4 Applied Load Effect ~
(1) In the case of a centric load or reaction, the punching shear force V ~ shall not exl::c;;d the
punching shear resistance VRdI or VRtIl given by Eqs. 4.36 or 4.37 as appropriate.
(2) In the case of an eccentric load or reaction, the applied load effect of tile puol;hing shear forl;e
V.td with eccentricity e shall be taken to be equal to that of an equivalent centric load V.q given by
Eq. 4.46.
V.q = ,BV Sd (4.46)
where ,B = 1 + l1eudlZ
e is the eccentricity of the load or reaction with respect to the centroid of the critil.:al
section, always positive
Z is the section modulus of the critical section, corresponding to tile direction of the
eccentricity
11 denotes fraction of moment which is considered transferred by eccentricity of the shear
about the centroid of the critical section
= 1/(1 + .J(b2IbJ
bl and b2 are sides of the rectangle of outline u, bl being parallel to the direction of the.
eccentricity e.
52 EBCS 2: Part 1 -1994
,
i .~
,
{
-CHAPTER 4: VL TIMA TE LIMIT STATES
---"
.~.. ~_\
(3) Conservatively, tite following values of fJ in (2) above may be used for flat slabs witit
-approximately equal spar.s and for footings:
(a) Interior column: fJ == 1.15
(b) Edge column: .6 = 1.40
(c) Corner column: .6 == i.SO
~. 7.5 Moment Transfer Between Slabs and Columns
(1) A fraction "7 of the moment is assumed to be transferred by eccentricity of tite shear about the
centroid of the critical section. The remaining moment shall be considered to be transferred by flexure
in accordance with Appendix A. -
4.7.6 Resistance of Slabs or Footings Without Punching Shear Reinforcement
(1) The punching re.sistance V Rdl shall he given by Eq. 4.47.
VRoiI = 0.25/cldk1k2ud (4.47)
where k. = (\ + SOp) ~ 2.0
k; = 1.6 -d ~ 1.0 (d in mete,..- For members where more titan 50% oftite bottom
feinforcement is curtailed, k1 = 1
d -= (dx + d,)/2
P, = (p,-, + pry)li2 ~ 0.015
-{I,x anj J."ry correspond to tite g~)metric ratios longitudinal reinforcement parallel to x
and y, respectively
..d is th~ averag~ eff~ctive height in the x and y directions
4.7.7 Resistance of Slabs or Footings ~.ith Punching Shear Reinforcement
(I) The punching resistancc witit punching shear reinforcement VRd2 shall be given by Eq. 4.48.
VRd2 = 1.6VRJI (4.48)
(2) The shear resistance of tite reinforcement may be calculated using Eq.4.33, where A~ is the sum
r of the areas of web reinforcement within tite I.:ritical perimeter.
i
4.7.8 Flat Siab~
(1) Flat slahs containing shear reint,)rl.:ement .'ihall have a minimum thickn~ss of 200 mm.
EBCS 2 -1995 53
,
"
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLANK] ..
...~.-"-.-
C
;~'
c
54
i
.CHAPTER 5
SERVICEABiliTY liMIT STATES
5.1 SCOPE
(1) This Chapter covers the common serviceability limit states. These are deflection control and crack
control.
Other limit states (such as stress or vibration) may be of importance in particular structures but these
are not covered in this Code.
5.2 LIMIT STATE OF DEFLECTION
5.2.1 General
(1) The deflection of a structure or any part of the structure shall not adversely affect the proper
functioning or appearance of the structure.
(2) This may be ensured either by keeping calculated deflections below the limiting values in Section
5.2.2 or by compliance with the requirements for minimum effective depth given in Section 5.2.3.
5.2.2 Limits on Deflection
(1) The final deflection (including the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage) of all horizontal
members shall not, in general, exceed the value.
L
() = ~ (5.1)
where, L. = the effective span
(2) For roof or floor construction supporting or attached to nonstructural e1ements (e.g partitions and
finishes) likely to be da.'11aged by large deflections, that part of the deflection which occurs after the
attachment of the non-structural elements shall not exceed the value.
L
() = -~ 20 mm (5.2)
350
(3) In any calculatiqn of deflections, the design properties of the materials and the design loads shall
be those defined in Sections 3.4 and 3.5 as appropriate for a serviceability limit state.
5.2.3 Requirements for Effective Depth
(1) The minimum effective depth obtained from Eq. 5.3 shall be provided unless computation of
deflection indicates that smaller thickness may be used without exceeding the limits stipulated in
-Section 5.2.2.
EBCS 2 -1995 55
ETHIOPIANBlJlLDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
---
d = (0.4 + 0.6~)~ (5.3) .
400 .Ba
where /yt is the characteristic strength of the reinforcement (MPA).
L. is the effective span; and, for two-way slabs, the shorter span.
.Ba is the appropriate constant from Table 5.1, and for slabs carrying partition walls
.
likely to crack, shall be taken as.Ba ~ 150lLo
La is the distance in meter between points of zero moments; and for a cantilever, twice
the length to the face of the support.
Table 5.1 Values of .Ba (Eq. 5.3)
Simply End Interior Cantilevers
Member Supported Spans Spans
Beams 20 24 28 10
Slabs
(a) Sp.an ratio = 2: 1 25 30 35 12
(b) Span ratio = 1: 1 35 40 45 10
Flat slabs (based on longer span) 24 -
Note: For s a s With intermediate span ratios Interpolate mearly.
5.2.4 Calculation of Deflections .
(1) When calculating deflections, the effect of creep and shrinkage strains on the curvature,' and
thereby on the deflection, shall be considered. ~
5.2.4.1 Immediate Deflections
(1) Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive analysis, deflections which occur
immediately on application of load shall be computed by the usual elastic methods as the sum of the
two parts 0; and OJ; given by Eqs. 5.4 and 5.5, but not more than Omax given by Eq. 5.6.
M
OJ = .BL2ri (5.4)
cm I
M -M
0 = {JL 2 t cr
jj O.75E,A,z(d-x) (5.51
M
0 = {JL2 tI
max E,A,z (d -x) (5.6)I
(2) Unless the theoretical moment which causes cracking is obtained by a more comprehensiveI
method, it shall be computed by .I
Mcr = 1. 70htk Z (5.7),I
.I
56 EBCS 2 -1995 .
1
\
\
: .
-CHAPTER 5: SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STATES
-
where OJ is the deflection due to the theoretical cracking moment M", acting on the uncracked
transformed section.
Ojj is the deflection due to the balance of the applied moment over and above the cracking
value and acting on a section with an equivalent stiffness of 75 % of the cracked value.
0 is the deflection of fully cracked section
As is the area of the tension reinforcement
E"WI is the short term elastic modulus (tangent modulus) of the concrete (Table 2.5).
Es is the modulus of elasticity of steel
Ii is the moment of inertia of the uncracked transformed concrete section
Mi is the maximum applied moment at mid-span due to sustained characteristic loads; for
cantilevers Mi is the moment at the face of the support
Z is the section modulus
d is the effective depth of the section
x is the neutral axis depth at the section of maximum moment
z is the internal lever arm at the section of maximum moment
.8 is the deflection coefficient depending on the loading and support conditions
(e.g. .8 = 5/48 for simply supported span subjected to uniformly distributed load).
Note: The value of x and z may be determined for the service load condition using a modular ratio
of 10, or for the ultimate load condition.
5.2.4.2 Long Tenn Deflections
(I) Unless values are obtained by more comprehensive analysis, the additional long-term deflection
of flexural members shall be obtained by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by the sustained
load considered, computed in accordance with Section 5.2.4.1, by the factor
12 -1.2As'/As] ~ 0.6 (5.8)
-where As' is the area of compression reinforcement
As is the area of tension reinforcement
5.3 LI~IIT STATES Of CRACKING Y
5.3.1 General
(I) For reinforced concrete, tW() limit states of cracking: the limit state of crack formation and the
I imit state of crack widths are of interest.
(2) The particular limit state to be checked is chosen on the basis of the requirements t()r durahility
and appearance. Th~ requirements for durahility dep~nd ()n the conditions of ~xposur~ and th~
s~nsitivity of th~ r~inforc~ment t(1 corrosion-
5.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement Arell.'i
(I);" assessing the minimum ar~a of reint()rc~ment r~quired to ~nsur~ c(lntr()lloo cracking in a
.memher or part (If a m~mh~r whi\.'h may be suhjected to tensile stress due to the restraint of imposoo
deformations, it is nec~ssary t(" distinguish h~tween two possible mechanisms hy which such stress
may arise. The tW(1 mechanisms are:
.EBCS 2 -7995 57
!'
(a) Restraint of intrinsic imposed deformations -where stresses are generated in a member due
to dimensional changes of the member considered being restrained (for example stress
induced in a member due to restraint to shrinkage of the member).
(b) Restraint of extrinsic imposed deformations -where the stresses are generated in the member
considered by its resistance to externally applied deformations (for ex~mple where a member
is stressed due to settlement of a support).
(~) It is also necessary to d.istinguish between two basic types of stress distribution within the member
at the onset of cracking. These are:
'(a) Bending -where the tensile stress distribution within the section is triangular (i.e. some part
of the section remains in compression). -
(b) Tension -where the whole of the section is subject to tensile stress.
(3) Unless more rigorous I;alculation shows a lesser area to be adequate, the required minimum areas
of reinforcement may be calculated from the relation given be Eq. 5.9.
As = kc ktcto.fAct las (5.9)
where As is the area of reinforcement
Act is the area of concrete within tensile zone. The tensile zone is that part of the section
which is calculated to be in tension just before formation of the first crack.
as is. the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after formation of
the crack. This may be taken as 100% of the yield strength of the reinforcement, /yt.
A lower value may, however, be needed to satisfy the crack with limits
!clot! is the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may first be
expected to occur. In many cases, such as where the dominant imposed defonnation
arises from dissipation of the heat of hydration, this may be within 3-5 days from
casting depending on the environmental conditions, the shape of the member and the
nature of the formwork. When the time of cracking cannot be established with
confidence as being less than 28 days, it is suggested that a minimum tensile strength
of 3 MPa be adopted.
kc is a coefficient which takes account of the nature of the stress distribution within the
section immediately prior to cracking. The stress distribution is that resulting from the
combination of effects of loading and restrained imposed deformation.
= 1.0 for pure tension
= 0.4 for bending without normal compressive force
k is a coefficient which allows for the effect of non-uniform self-equilibrating stresses
Values of k for various situations are given below:
(a) tensile stresses due to restraint of intrinsic deformations generally k = 0.8
for rectangular sections when h ~ 300 mm, k = 0.8
h ~ 800 mm k = 0.5
(b) tensile stresses due to restraint of extrinsic deformations k = 1.0.
Parts of sections distant from the main tension reinforcement, such as outstanding parts of a section
or the webs of deep sections, may be considered to be subjected to imposed deformations by the
tension chord of the member. For such cases, a value in the range 0.5 < k < 1.0 will be
appropriate.
58 EBCS 2 -1995 .
--CHAPTER 5: SERVICEABILITY LIMIT STA ~
(4) The minimum reinforcement may be reduced or even be dispensed with altogether if the imposed
deformation is sufficiently small that it is unlikely to cause cracking. In such cases minimum
reinforcement need only be provided to resist the tensions due to the restraint.
5..3.3 Limit State of Crack Formation
(1) The maximum tensile stresses in the concrete. are calculated under the action of design loads
appropriate to a serviceability limit state and on the basis of the geometrical properties of the
transformed uncracked concrete cross section.
(2) .The calculated stresses shall not exceed the following values:
(a) Flexure
U", = 1.70/"tk
(b) Direct tension
U", = J;tk (5.11)
(3) In addition to the above, minimum reinforcement in accordance with Chapter 7 shall be provided
for the control of cracking.
5.3.4 Limit St~te of Crack Widths
5.3.4.1 General
(1) Adequate protection against corrosion may be assumed provided that the minimum concrete covers
in Section 7.1.3 are complied with and provided further that the characteristic crack widths Wi do not
.exceed the limiting values given in Table 5.2 appropriate to the different conditions of exposure.
Table 5.2 Characteristic Crack Width for Concrete Members
Dry environment: Humid environment: Seawater and/or aggressive
Interior of buildings Interior components chemical environment: Compo-
Type of of normal habitation (e.g. laundries); exterior nents completely or partially
exposure or offices components; components in submerged in seawater; com-
non-aggressive soil and/or ponents in saturated salt air;
water aggressive "industrial atmo-
(Mild) (Moderate) spheres (Severe)
Characteristic
crack width, Wk 0.4 0.2 0.1
(rom)
5.3.4.2 Cracks due to Flexure
(1) Checking of the limit state of flexural crack widths is generally not necessary for reinforced
concrete where
(a) at least the minimum reinforcement given by Section 5.3.2 is provided
(b) the reinforcement consists of deformed bars, and
.(c) their diameter does not exceed the maximum values in Table 5.3.
.EBCS 2 -1995 59
EJ'H)IIIAN BtaDlNO CODE STANDARD FqR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE --
Table 5.3 Maximum Bar Diameter for which Checking flexural Crack Width may be
~Ued
Wt = 0.4 mm w., = 0.2 mm
0'1 ~) ~ ,(mm) 0'1 (MPa) <P (nlm)
I
1.6() 40 lro 25
,200 32 200 16
240 25 240 12
280 20 320 6
320 16 400 4
ere necessary meat mterpo .
In Table 5.2
0'1 .istbe IteeI str~ Under service condition
Wi is the pennitted characteristic crack width
(2) If crack widths have to be calculat~. the following approximate equations may he used in the
aence of more accurate methods
Wt = 1.7w. (5.12)
w.. == S_E- (5.13)
where Wi is the characteristic crack width
w. is the meaD crack width
s.. is the average distance between cracks
E- is the mean strain of the reinforcement considering th~ contribution of concrete in
tension. .
(3) The average distance between cracks may be obtain~ from
s.. = 50 + 0.25K;jK;Zi (5.14)
Pr
where ~ is the bar diameter
":1 is a coefficient which characterizes the bond properties of the bars
I = 0.8 fordeform~ bars
I = 1.6 for plain bars
2 is a coefficient representing the influence of the forD} of the stress diagram
2 = 0.50 for bending
2 = 1.00 for pure tension
2 = (fl + EJ/2El for bending with tension
EI. E2 are the larger and the smaller concrete strain.~, r.espectively. below the neutral axis
of the crack~ section given in Fig. 5.1.
60 EBCS 2 -1995
.-CHAPTER 5: SERVICEASIUTY11MITSTATES
In Eq. 5.14, the coefficient Pr is defined as
A
J
P =-
r A
c.if
where AI is the area of ~e reinforcement contained in Ac..!
Ac..! is the section of the zone of the concrete (effective embedment zone) where the
reinforcing bars can eft.ectively influence the crac~ widths shown by the shaded area
in Fig. 5.1.
(al Beam
II d
(bl Slab
"7? 1'..-r"""",,"7".rrr.rrr~"...f
...11~".",.",.,.LesserOf25(C'./2)
~~ or (h-..i/3
I
.(cl Member in tension
.
.
.
Lesser Of 2.5 (c. -P/2) or t;'l
Figure 5.1 Definition of At..!
(4) The meall strain of the reinforcement may be obtained as
0' 0' 2 0'
E = ~[1 -.B .B (~
) ] ~ 0.4~ (5.16)
"" E I 2 0' E
J J J
where O'J is the service stress in the steel and may be obtained by elastic theory using modular
ratio equal to 10
O'rr is the steel stress at rupture of concrete section; i.e., stress for the cracked section
I under the action of the theoretical moment Mtr defined in Section 5.2.4.1
I. .Bj is a coefficient which characterizes the bond properties of the bars and is equal to
.Bj = 1.0 for high bond bars
.Bz = 0.5 for plain bars
.Bz is a coefticient representing the influence of the duration of the application or
.repetition of the loads.
.Bz = 1.0 at the first loading
.Bz ':= 0.5 tor sustained loads or for a large number of load cycles
.
EBCS 2 -1995 61
.,
5.3.4.3 Cracking due to Shear
(1) Checking of shear crack widths is not necessary in slabs and in the web of beams if the spacing
I of the stirrups does not exceed the values given in Table 5.4.
~
j Table 5.4 Maximum Spacing (mm) of Vertical Stirrups for which Checking of Shear Crack
I ,Width is Omitted
j
Wk (mm) 0.4 0.2
~
~ fyd (MPa) 220 400 360 500 220 400 360 500
i Bond Properties (1) (2) (1) (2) (I) (2) (I) (2)
300 250 200 ISO
250 200 ISO 100
200 ISO 100 75
In Table 5.4,
Wi is the permitted characteristic crack width
V.. is the shear acting during the combination under consideration
Vc is the shear resistance of concrete; Eqs. 4.29 and 4.30.
(2) If more precise data are available, then the widths of the shear cracks in the webs of beams can
be calculated for sustained loads by means of Eq. 5.13 together with the following equations:
W = 1.7K W (5.17)
i w '"
<p d-x;
S.w. = 50 + 0.25KJKi- ~ .
(5 18) p sma .
r
a V 2 a
f- = i[1 -(V)] ~ 0.4i (5.19)
I.. I
V -V 1
a = ..c. ~ 40 MPa
(5 20 I b dp (sina + cosa). )
where w", is the mean crack width (see Eq. 5.12)
a is the angle of inclination of the stirrup from the horizontal
K", is a correction coefficient to take account of the effect of slope of the stirrups on the
spacing of the cracks.
K", = 1.2 for vertical stirrups (a = 90")
K", = 0.8 for inclined stirrups with a = 450 to 6<r
P'" is the geometric percentage of web reinforcement
x; is the height of the compression zone in the cracked sel.'tion
(3) When several adjacent bars in the same layer are bent in the same zone (for example, at the
corners of a frame), the diameter of mandrel shall be chosen with a view to avoiding crushing or .
splitting of the concrete under the effect of the pressure that occurs inside the bend (see Eq. 7.7).
--62 EBCS 2 -1995--
J~
:~ 1,
6 ., f,
CHAPfER [!
I;
iJ
I SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS :1
I
:
I. 6.1 SCOPE
(1) This chapter gives methods of analysis and design of special structural elements that in general
ensure that the objectives set out in Chapter 3 are met.
j
j
i (2) Other methods may be used provided they can be shown to be satisfactory for the types of
; structure or member considered.
(3) It is assumed that the ultimate limit state is the critical limit state.
I 6.2 WALLS
6.2.1 Reinforced Concrete Walls j
(1) A reinforced concrete wall is a vertical load-bearing member whose greatest lateral dimension is
more than four times its leaSt lateral dimension, and in which the reinforcement is taken into account
when considering its strength. For walls subjected predominantly to out-of-plane bending, the rules
for slabs apply.
(2) The requirements on minimum areas of reinforcement given in Chapter 7 shall be complied with.
.
(3) A reinforced wall shall be considered as either short or slender and as either braced or unbraced
as follows:
Short or Slender Walls: A wall may be considered short when the ratio of its effective height
to its thickness does not exceed 7. It shall otherwise be considered slender. ;
;
:
i Braced or Unbraced Walls: A wall may be considered as braced if, at right angles to the plane \'
i of the wall, lateral stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or other suitable ,
!' i bracing designed to resist all lateral forces in that direction. It shall otherwise be considered as ~
unbraced. J
"
f
,
(4) The overall stability of a multi-story building shall not, in any direction, depend on unbraced walls ~
alone. ~
f
f
6.2.1.1 Design of Reinforced Concrete Wails for Flexure and Axial Loads I
(1) Walls subject to combined flexure and axial load shall be designed under the provisions of Chapter I
4, unless designed in accordance with Section 6.2.2.
(2) The length of the wall to be considered effective for each concentrated load sh~ll not exceed the
.; center-to-center distance between loads, nor shall it exceed the width of the bearing olus four times
! the wall thickness. t
,
.,
!
: EBCS 2 -1995 63 i
,~
i
I
I
--.
(3) Effective Height: The effective height Le of reinforced concrete walls in the non-sway mode shall
be determined from Eq. 6.1. .
L. = fJL (6.1)
where L is the story height of the wall
fJ is the coefficient defined in Eqs. 6.2 to 6.5
The following values shall be adopted for the coefficient fJ:
,
(1) Walls with two edges restrained :
fJ = 1.00 ~ (6.2)
(2) Walls with three edges restrained
1
fJ = ~ 0.3
(6 3) 1 + (L/3b)' .
;,-
(3) Walls with four edges restrained
1
fJ = for L ~ b (6 4)
1 + (L/b)2 .
1
fJ = '- for L > b (6.5)
2 (L/b)
where b is the width of the wall measured center-to-center of the bracing walls, or width
measured from the center of a bracing wall to the free edge.
...
6.2.1.2 Shear Resi5tance of Reinforced Walls
(1) Design for horizontal shear forces in the plane of the wall shall be in accordance with provisions
for beam in Section 4.5.3, with the following modifications:
(a) The effective depth d shall be taken as 0.8b
(b) Sections located closer to the base than a distance b/2 or L/2, whichever is less, be designed
for the shear at b/2 or L/2
(c) When the applied shear V.-l is less than V" /2, the minimum shear reinforcement required by
the provisions of Chapter 7 shall be provided.
(2) Design for shear forces perpendicular to the face of the wall shall be in accordance with
provisions for slabs in Section 4.5.3.
6.2.2 Plain Concrete Walls
(1) A plain concrete wall is a vertical load bearing concrete member whose greatest lateral dimension
is more than four times its least lateral dimension and which is assumed to be without reinforcement -
when considering its strength, irrespective of whether it is actually reinforced or not. The definitions
for a short or slender, or braced or unbraced wall given in Section 6.2.1 for a reinforced concrete.
wall shall apply also to a plain concrete wall.
64 EBCS 2 -1995 .
I CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
II .6.2..2.1 Design of Plain Concrete Walls for Flexure and Axial Loads '
(1) The simplified design -procedure given below may be used for plain concrete walls with
II
.eccentricities of load in the plane of the wall of up to one-third the length of the wall and at right J
"
angles to the wall of up to half the thickness of the wall. 1\,
"
1i
(2) The slenderness ratio A shall not exceed 100. t.,
(3) Effective Height: The effective height of plain concrete walls shall be determined from Eq. 6.1 I)
as for reinforced concrete walls. 11.
(4) Axial Load Capacity: Design axial load strength of plain concrete wall shall be computed from: t '
(a) Braced Walls: for short braced walls, the axial load resistance NRd is given by: !
~ :J I ..
i F
NRd = (1 -2e/h)Actd (6.6);! 1
'I " ."
! !
where e is the resultant eccentricity of load at right angles to the plane of the wall (minimum I
value of O.OSh) 'I
h is the thickness of the wall J
..
Ac is the cross-sectional area of the wall. 11
.{
u
~I
For slender braced walls, the axial load resistance is given by Eq.6.6 with the eccentricity e ,\
redefined and calculated as given below: )'
,...
!
c
e = 0'&0 + e2 (6.7)'"
where eo is the resultant eccentricity of load at right angles to the plane of the wall (minimum
.value of O.OSh).
~ e2 is the second order eccentricity is given by 0.4h(L./10h)2
(b) Unbraced Walls: The axial load resistance NRd is calculated at the top and at the bottom of
the wall using Eq. 6.7 but with e redefined and calculat~ as given below:
at the top:
1 e = eo! (6.8)
I :'
; ';
I at the bottom: ;~
e = e02 + e2 (6.9) i
! where eo! is the first order eccentricity at the top of the Wall
! e02 the first order eccentricity at the bottom of the wall
i e2 is the second order eccentricity given by 0.4h(L./10h)2 I
, i
, 6.2.2.2 Shear Resistance of Plain Walls !
I Design for shear resistance of plain walls shall be in accordance with the provisions for reinforced ~
., walls given in Section 6.2.1.2. 1
EBCS 2 -1995 65
~
6.3 DEEP BEAMS
6.3.1 General
(1) Flexural members with span-to-depth ratios less than 2 for simple spans, or 2.5 for continuous .-
spans are defined as deep beams.
(2) Deep beams under a concentrated load may be designed using a simple strut and tie model.
(3) In some cases, e.g. lower depth/span ratios, distributed loads, more than one concentrated load,
etc., models combining strut and tie action with truss action may be used.
,
(4) Continuous deep beams are sensitive to differential settlement. A range of support reactions,
corresponding to possible settlements, should therefore be considered.
(5) Design for shear effects shall be in accordance with Section 6.3.2.
(6) The detailing requirements of Chapter 7 generally, and Section 7.2.6 in particular, shall be met.
6.3.2 Dt'Sign for Shear
(1) These provisions apply to:
(a) Shear spans supporting a principal load as defined in Section 6.3.2.1 located at a distance Q"
not greater than twice the effective depth d.
I' (b) Shear spans not supporting a principal load or portions of beams supporting uniform loads
in which the distance IJ between the points of zero shear and the support is less than three
times the effective depth.
I (2) In each case, the beams shall be loaded on the top face and supported on the hottom face. For
I beams loaded by members framing into the sides, the load may he assumed to he applied at the U)p
of the supported member provided that reinforcement satisfying the requirements fi)r indirect supp()rts
given in Section 6.6.3 is provided.
(3) Beams supported on members framing into the sides may he a.~sumed U) he supported at the level
of the bottom of the supporting memher.
6.3.2.1 Definitions and Limitation
(I) For a given shear span, a principal load is a concentrated l()ad which causes 50 percent or more
of the shear at the support of that shear span.
(2) The shear span Q" shall be taken equal to the distance from the center of the principal IlIad U) the
center of the support. This span shall ru)t he more than 1.15 times the clear distanc:e fr()m the fac:e
of the load to the face of the support. The distance IJ shall he taken equal U) the distance t'r()m the
point of zero shear to the center of the support hut not more than 1.15 times the clear distance t'r()m
the point of zero shear to the face of the support.
66 EBCS 2 .1995
..,. -' .,"'"
CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS '[
.[I'
6.3.2.2 ShearStrength of Deep Shear Spans !
(1) The shear resistance of deep shear spans SRJ shall be obtained as the sum of the resistances of the
coQcrete V cd and the vertical and horizontal stirrups V, and V~, respectively. .
(2) The applied shear V sa shall not exceed the'limit imposed by Eq.4.28.
6.3.2.3 Shear Carried by Deep Shear Spans
(1) For deep shear spans supporting a principal load,
(a) The shear resistance V RJ shall be computed at aj2. The shear reinforcement required at this
section shall be used throughout the entire shear span.
(b) The shear force Vc carried by the concrete shall be taken as the value obtained from
Eq. 4.28 multiplied with
2d
.B = a '2: 1.0 (6.10)
y
(c) The shear force V, transferred by vertical stirrups shall be given by
d
AJyd (ay -2) Aydfyd
V, = .)' ~ s- (6.11)
y y
(d) The shear force Vii transferred by horizontal stirrups shall be given by
3d
Avilfyd(T -ay) A vii dfyd
Vii = ~ (6.12)
Sil Sil
where Ay is the area of vertical stirrl:lps
Avio is the area of horizontal stirrups
Sy is the spacing of the vertical stirrups (Sy ~ d/4)
Sil is the spacing of the horizontal stirrups Sil ~ d/3)
(2) Ay and Avil shall satisfy the minimum requirement given in Section 7.2.1.2
(3) For deep shear spans not supporting a principal load, the above provisions apply with ay /2
replaced by 1.. /3.
6.4 CORBELS
6.4.1 Definitions and Limitations
(1) These provisions apply to corbels having a shear span to depth ratio avid of unity or less.
(2) The distance d shall be measured at a section adjacent to the face of the support, but shall not be
-taken greater than twice the depth of the corbel at the outside edge of the bearing area.
.-EBCS 2 -7995 67
6.4.2 Design .
(1) Corbels with 0.4d ~ ay ~ d may be designed using a simple strut and tie model. .
(2) For deeper corbels (ay > d), other adequate strut and tie models may be considered.
(3) Corbels for which ay > d may be designed as cantilever beams.
, (4) Unless special provision is made to limit horizontal forces on the support, or other justification
is given, the corbel shall be designed for the vertical force Fy, and a horizontal force Hc ~ 0.2 Fy
.acting at the bearing area.
(5) The effective depth d of the corbel shall be determined from considerations of shear (see
Section 4.5).
(6) The local effects due to the assumed strut and tie system should be considered on the overall
design of the supporting member.
(7) The detailing requirements of Chapter 7 generally, and Section 7.2.7 in particular, shall be met.
av Fy
Hc
-
-tle-
ul -
,;S"/ hc
~
/ .
Figure 6.1 Example of a Corbel with a Strut and Tie Model
6.5 FOOTINGS
6.5.1 Moment in Footings
(1) The external moment on any section of a footing shall be determined by passing a vertical plane
through the footing, and computing the moment of the forces acting over the entire area of the footing
on one side of that vertical plane.
(2) The critical section for moment shall be taken as follows:
(a) At the face of column, pedestal, or wall, for footings supporting a concrete column pedestal
or wall
(b) Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings supporting a masonry wall.
(c) Halfway between face of column and edge of steel base for footings supporting a column with .
steel base plates.
68 EBCS 2 -1995
I ' ,
.' r
CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
6.5.2 Flexural Reinforcement
(1) Distribution: In one-way footings and two-way square footings, reinforcement shall be distributed
uniformly across the entire width of footing.
(2) In two.;way rectangular footings, reinforcement shall be distributed as follows:
(a) Reinforcement in long direction shall be distributed uniformly across the entire width of
footing.
(b) For reinforcement in the short direction, a portion of the total reinforcement given by Eq.
6.13 shall be distributed uniformly over a band width (centered on center line of column or
pedestal) equal to the length of the short side of footing. The remainder of the reinforce-
ment required in the short direction shall be distributed uniformly outside the center band
widm of the footing.
Reinforcement i~ b~d w~~th. = -..?:.- (6.13)
Total reinforcement in ~hort direction {3 + 1
where {3 is the ratio of long side to short side of footing.
(3) Anchorage: If the projection of the footing from the critical section for moment defined in
Section 6.5.1 does not exceed the effective depth d at that section, the bottom reinforcement shall be
provided with full anchorage length measured from the end of the straight portion of the bars.
(4) ,If the projection exceeds d, the anchorage length may be measured from a section situated at a
distance d from the above defined critical section for moment.
6.5.3 Shear in Footings
(1) Design of footings for shear shall be in accordance with provisions for slabs in Section 4.5.
(2) The location of the critical section for shear in accordance with Section 4.5 shall be measured
from face of column, pedestal or wall for footings supporting a column, pedestal, or wall.
(3) For footings supporting a column or pedestal with steel base plates, the critical section shall be
measured from the location defined in Section 6.5.1.
6.5.4 Bearing
(1) All forces and moments applied at the base of a column or pedestal shall be transferred to the top
of the supporting pedestal or footing by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement.
(2) The design bearing strength on concrete shall not exceed the design compressive strength !cd'
except as follows:
(a) When the supporting surface is wider on all sides than the loaded area, the design bearing
strength on the load area may be multiplied by v(A;iA;)but not more than 2.
.EBCS 2 -1995 69
--~,
(b) When the supporting surface is sloped or stepped, A2 may be taken as the area of the lower
base of the largest frustrum of a right pyramid or cone contained wholly within the support
and having for its upper base the loaded area, and having side slopes of 2 vertical to 1
~ horizontal.
In the above A1 is the loaded area, and Az is the maximum area of the portion of the supporting
'surface that is geometrically similar to and concentric with the loaded area.
6.5.5 Minimum Footing Depth
(1) The depth of footing above bottom reinforcement shall not be less than 150 rom for footings on
soil, nor 300 rom for footings on piles.
6.5.6 Plain Concrete Pedestals and Footings
(1) The maximum compressive stress in plain concrete pedestals shall not exceed the concrete bearing
strength given in Section 6.5.4.
(2) Plain concrete footing may be used provided that the projection of the footing beyond the critical
section defined in Section 6.5.1 does not exceed half the thickness of the footing at that section.
(3) Flexural design stresses in plain concrete shall not exceed 1.70fc/d' .
(4) Shear and punching shall be checked in accordance with Sections 4.8 and 4.10. -
(5) Plain concrete shall not be used for pile caps.
(6) The depth of plain concrete footings shall not be less than 200 mm.
6.6 PILE CAPS
6.6.1 Moment in Pile Caps
(1) Section 6.6.1 shall apply to pile caps also.
6.6.2 li1exural Reinforcement
(1) Distribution: The bottom reinforcement may consist partly of bars placed in strips between the
piles.
(2) Anchorage: The reinforcement shall always be arranged, n such a way that adequate anchorage
is provided beyond the axial plane of the piles. .
(3) This may be deemed to be satisfied if the tensile force in the reinforcement crossing a pile, within
a width of 3 pile diameters, is not less than the pile reaction, assuming the reinforcement is fully.
stressed .
..
'70 E~ -' ~ 1-9-95
.
CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
6.6.3 Shear
(1) Computation of shear on any section through a pile cap shall be in accordance with the following: ;
(a) The total reaction from any pile whose ~en~er is located half pile diameter or more out-side t ~~
the section shall be considered as producing shear on that section. "
(b) Reaction from any pile whose center is loc~ed half pile diameter or more inside the section
shall be considered as producing no shear on that section.
(c) Eorintermediate positions of pile center, linear interpolation between (a) and (b) above may
be assumed.
6.6.4 Footings on Two Piles
(1) Secondary reinforcement distributed horizontally and vertically is required only for footings
resting on only two piles, in consideration of one-way deep beam action of such footings.
(2) The amount of the secondary reinforcement to be provided shall be as for deep beams (see
Section 6.6:2):
6.6.5 Minimum Thickness
(1) The thickness' of pile above the bottom reinforcement shall not be less than 300 mIn.
6.7 PARTICULAR CAS~
6.7.1 Local Forces
(1) When a local compressive stress is applied at the end of a structural member or the intersection
of two structural members, transverse reinforcement capable of resisting the resulting transverse
tensile stresses shall, in general, be provided. However, this requirement may be waived provided
the dispersion of the pressure is not steeper than 2 vertical to 1 horizontal as stipulated in
Section 6.7.4.
(2) When transverse reinforcement is provided, it shall be evenly distributed over a distance measured
perpendicular to area Ai between O.1~ and~; ~ being the side length of are.a A2 measured in the
direction of the d;spersion of the local force (see Fig. 6.2).
(3) The transverse tensile force may be obtained for two-()rthogonal directions as:
ai
Ntd = O.3F,,(1 --) (6.14)
a2
where F" is the local force
.ai is the side length of area Al measured parallel to ~ (see Fig. 6.2).
-6.7.2 Concentrated Forces
(1) Where one or more concentrated forces act at the end of a member or at the intersection of two
structural members, local supplementary reinforcement should be provided capable of resisting the
.transverse tensile forces caused by these forces.
EBCS 2 -1995 71
c ~..III.I.i,!.?" C -
; !;~~
c ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
, 2 .1
1- 02,
Figure 6.2 Distribution of the Transverse Force
6.7.2 Concentrated Forces
(1) Where one or more concentrated forces act at the end of a member or at the intersection of two
structural members, local supplementary reinforcement should be provided capable of resisting the
transverse tensile forces caused by these forces.
,
(2) This supplementary reinforcement may consist of links or of layers of reinforcement bent in the
shape of hair pins.
(3) For a uniform distribution of load on area AcD' (Fig. 6.3), the concentrated resistance force can
be determined as follows:
F Rdu = --~~- ~ 3.3tdAcD (6.15)
v/A:JA:
where AcD denotes the loaded area
Acl denotes the maximum area corresponding geometrically to AcD' having the same
center of gravity, which it is possible to inscribe in the total area AcI situated in the
same plane as the loaded area.
If Ac and Aco correspond geometrically and have the same center of gravity: Acl = Ac.
The value of FRdu obtained from Eq. B.20 should be reduced if the load is not uniformly
distributed on area ACD or if it is accompanied by large shear forces.
This method applies to post-tensioned members and does not apply to the anchorages of
prestressing tenqons (Section B.4.2.1).
6.7.3 Bursting Forces .
(1) Concentrated bursting forces which occur when there are major changes in the direction in which -
internal forces act as in frame joints, for example, shall be resisted by additional suitably anchored
reinforcement (see Fig. 6.4).
72 EBCS 2 -1995 .
,'..'
.: '
,
I
~ CHAPTER 6: SPECIAL STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
..;I;~
" Ac,
Ac
AcO
plan view
figure 6.3 Definition or the Areas to be intr~duced in Eq.B.l
6.7.4 Indirect: Supports
(1) The junction between a bearing beam or girder and supported beam is defined as an indirect
support.
(2) The reinforcement needed for the transmission of the load from the beam to the girder may be
determined by truss analogy.
(3) The hanging or transmission reinforcement shall normally be calculated for the total reaction
acting at the support but may be reduced in the ratio of hl/~ if the height hI of the supported beam
is smaller than the height ~ of the girder provided that the top surfaces of the two beams ar6 at the
same level (see Fig. 6.5). No reduction shall be made when loads are suspended at the lower part
':,' of a member. Fe
..c', R ..c:::~::J R
'-0;;;::= c
~
(0)
R-t{rF:
C F:
1-;-';- ) ~
~
.( b)
C
figure 6.4 Examples or Bursting Forces
EBCS 2 -1995 73
r: !
.
(4) Transmission reinforcement shall be composed preferably of stirrups surrounding the main
reinforcement of the girder. The stirrups shall be distributed in tIle girder within a distance O.5h1 on
~ either side of the beams.
~
t (5) The ma~n reinforcement in the supported beam shall be placed above that of the girder.
f \
II
~i!,!i,
)I,
I,
I,,
.
(b)
Mutual
R taction
I
h
I. (c)
Fi~ure 6.5 Exampl~ of an Indirect Support
74 EBCS 2 -1995
.
""-
~,.".,.';"Tc"""'--,
\
i
!
:'
\
1 CHAPTEi:t 7 i\
DETAILING PROVISIONS
7.1 DETAILING OF REINFORCEMENT
7.1.1 General
(1) The mechanical and bonding properties of the reinforcement shall meet the requirements of the
specified standard.
7.1.2 Bending of Bars
(1) The t:ninimum diameter to which' a bar is bent shall be such as to avoid crushing or splitting of
the concrete inside the bend of the bar, and to avoid bending cracks in the bar.
(2) The minimum diameter of the mandrel used shall be at least equal to the minimum specified for
the bend-rebend test of the reinforcement.
(3) For bars or'.'-;fires, the minimum diameter of the mandrel used should be not less than the values
given in Table 7.1.
TabLe 7.1 -Minimum Diameter of Bend
Bar size Main Reinforcement Stirrups and Ties
c;i> ~ 16 5c;i> 4c;i>
16 < c;i> ~ 25 6c;i> 6c;i>
25 < c;i> 32 8c;i> -
c;i> > 32 lOc;i> -
(4) When several adjacent bars in the same layer are bent in the same zone (for example, at the
corners of a frame), the diameter of mandrel shall be chosen with a view to avoiding crushing or
splitting of the concrete under the effect of the pressure that occurs inside the bend (see Eq. 7.7)
7.1.3 Concrete Cover to Reinforcement
(1) The concrete cover is the distance between the outer surface of the reinforcement (including links
and stirrups) and the nearest concrete surface.
(2) A minimum concrete cover shall be provided in order to ensure:
(a) the safe transmission of bond forces;
-(b) that spalling will not occur;
(c) an adequate fire resistance;
(d) the protection of the steel against corrosion.
EBCS 2 -1995 75
t
.
(3) The protection of reinforcement against corrosion depends upon the continuing presence of a .
surrounding alkaline environment provided by an adequate thickness of good quality, well-cured
concrete. The thickness of cover required depends both upon the exposure conditions and on the
concrete quality.
(4) The minimum concrete cover required for the criterion in (3) above shal\first be determined; This
shall be increased by an allowable (Ah) for tolerances, which is dependent .on the type and size of
\
structural element, the type of construction, standards of workmanship and quality control, ~d
detailing practice. The result is the required nominal cover which shall be specified on the drawings.
(5) To transmit bond forces safely, and to ensure adequate compaction, the concrete cover, to the b~
or tendon being considered, should never be less than: .
(a) <P or <Po (~ 40 mm), or
(b) p + 5 mm) or Po + 5 mm) if dB > 32 mm
where <P is the diameter of the bar
<Po is the equivalent diameter for a bundle
dB is the largest nominal maximum aggregate size.
~ (6) The minimum concrete cover to all reinforcement including links and stirrups should not be less
j than the appropriate values given in Table 7.2.
J Table 7.2 l"\l1inimum Cover Requirements for Concrete Members -
I Dry environment: Humid environment: Seawater and/or aggressive
I Interior of buildings Interior components chemical environment: Compo-
Type of of normal habitation (e.g. laundries); exterior nents completely or partially sub- .
t
exposure or offices components; components in merged in seawater; components
.non-aggressive soil and/or in saturated salt air; aggressive
water industrial atmospheres
(Mild) (Moderate) (Severe)
..Minimum
.cover 15 25 50
4 (mm)
4
.(7) Where surface reinforcement is used, the cover should either comply with (6) above, or protective
measures should be taken (e.g. protective coatings); in any case, the minimum cover shall not be less
than 20 mm.
(8) The allowance (Ah) for tolerance will usually be in the range of 0 mm < Ah < 5 mm, for
precast elements, if production control can guarantee these values and if this is verified by quality
control. The allowance will be in the range of 5 mm < &z < 10 mm for insitu reinforced concrete
construction.
(9) For concrete cast against uneven surfaces, the minimum covers given in Table 7.1 should -
generally be increased by larger allowances for tolerances. For example, for concrete cast directly
against the earth, the minimum cover should be greater than 75 mm; for concrete cast against -
prepared ground (including blinding) the minimum cover should be greater than 40 mm. Surfaces
having design features, such as ribbed finishes or exposed aggregate, also require increased cover.
76 EBCS 2 -1995 .
~
"" -1
1 -" CHAPTER 6: DETAILING PROVI51 ,~
(10) The nominal cover shall always be at least equal to the diameter of the bar cp and in the case of I
.bundles to the size of a single bar of equivalent area given by Eq. 7.1. : .
cp .cp .{ri" (7.1) r
1 .~ .,
where cp. is the effective diameter of the bundle I:
cp. is the diameter of bars forming the bundle
.I n is the number of bars in the bundle
.:
,;;~ .(11) The required minimum covers given in Table 7.1, as Inodified to allow for tolerances, may be
insufficient for fire protection. Particular requirements for fire resistance are given in the National
Building Code.
7.1.4 Spacing of R,einCorcement
(1) The spacing of bars shall be suitable for the proper compaction of concrete and when an internal
vibrator is likely to be used, sufficient space shall be left between reinforcement to enable the vibrator
to be inserted.
(2) The maximum aggregate size d, should be chosen to permit adequate compaction of the concrete
round the bars.
f;~ (3) The clear horizontal and vertical distance between bars shall be at least equal to the largest of the
'".J .
,~ followmg values:
',,;
(a) 20 mm
(b) The diameter of the largest bar or effective diameter of the bundle
(c) The maximum size of the aggregate d, plus 5 mm
(4) Where bars are positioned in separate horizontal layers, the bars in each layer should be located
vertically above each other and the space between the resulting columns of bars should permit the
.passage of an internal vibrator.
(5) Lapped bars may touch one another within the lap length.
(6) Maximum distance between bars shall comply with the requirements of Section 7.2.
7.1.5 Bond
7.1.5.1 Design Bond Strength
(1) The design bond strengthfw depends on the type of reinforcement, the concrete strength and the
position of the bar during concreting.
(2) The bond conditions are considered to be good for:
(a) All bars which are in the lower half of an element
(b) All bars in, elements whose depth does not exceed 300 mm
-(c) All b2IS which are at least 300 mm from the top of an element in which they are placed
(d) All bars with an. inclination of 450 to 90" to the horizont.al during concreting.
EBC5 2 -1995 77
.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FO~ STRUCTUR-;-;~~~ OF CONCRETE~
~ (3) For good bond conditions, the design bond strength of plain bars may be obtained from Eq. 7.2
fiNi = fctd (7.2)
(4) For deformed bars twice the value for I:>lain bars may be used.
(5) For other bond conditions, the design bond strength may be taken as 0.7 times the value for good
bond conditions.
7.1.6 Anchorage of Reinforcement
0) All reinforcement shall be properly anchored at each end with due consideration for the effect of
arch action and shear cracks.
(2) To prevent bond failure, the tension or compression in any bar at any section due to ultimate loads
shall be developed. on each side of the section by an appropriate embedment length or end anchorage
or a combination thereof. Hooks may be used in developing bars in tension.
7.1.6.1 Basic Anchorage LengthI
(1) The basic anchorage length is the embedment length required to develop the full design strength
of a straight reinforcing bar.
~ (2) The basic anchorage length lb for a bar of diameter <I> is:
j
I -<I> ~d
i b -4. ~ (7.3)II
7.1.6.2 Required Anchorage Length .
I (1) The required anchorage length lb,"" depends on the type of anchorage and on the stress in tile
reinforcement and can be calculated as: .
A
lb,ner = albT ~ lb.min (7.4)
s...!
where As.caJ is the the<Jretil;al area of reinf(Jrl;ement required oy the dt.:sign
As...! is the area of reint(Jrl;em~nt actually provided'
a = 1.0 for straight bar anl;h(Jrag~ in t~nsion or I;(Jmpr~ssi(m
= 0.7 for anl;horag~ in t~nsitJn with th~ standard h()()ks (Jf Fig. 7.2
lb.""" is the minimum anl;h()rage length
(2) F(Jr oars in tensi()n,
lh""", = 0.31b ~ 10<1>
()r ~200mm (7.))
(3) F()r oars in 1;()mpressi(Jn,
lh""", = O.(J/h ~ 101>
()r ~ 200 mm (7.(,) -
78 EBCS 2 -1995
~
'/""""',c ""c.c"C~""""'.i'.C'
." -..CHAPTER 6:DETAILlNQ PROVISIONS. !
i ~ : I
I i
j
"'- -F:
t ~
\- /, b,net~_~ ~
T
.
iW) AI , .(b)
a~~_~ !
I. },b,net I ~
Figure 7.1 Standard Hooks
7.1.6.3 Additional Requirements for Loops
(1) In order to prevent concrete failure in the plane of a loop anchorage, the diameter of the mandrel
used must satisfy Eq. 7.7.
cp C1sd
d ~ (0.7 + 1.4-)-cp (7.7)
s 1.51c"
where C1 sd is the stress in the bar at the start of the bend
s is the smaller of:
-the spacing between the loops
-the cover c increased by half the diameter cp
7.1.6.4 Ties and Stirrups
(1) The type of anchorage used shall not induce splitting or spalling of the concrete cover.
(2) Anchorage by hooks (1350 to 1800) is required for plain bars.
(3) Anchorage by bends (900 to 1350) is only allowed for deformed bars.
(4) The required anchorage Ib,MI shall be measured from the mid-depth of the member.
.
EBCS 2 -1995 79
.
,
-
7.1.6.5 Laps and Joints .
(1) The length of lap 10 shall be at least equal to: .
10 ~ aJb,Ml ~ lo,m (7.8)
where lo,m = 0.3aaJb ~ 15~
or ~ 200 mrn
~ Ib'Ml and a are given in Section 7.1.6.2.
al is a function of the percentage of the reinforcement lapped at anyone section as given
in Table 7.3. Lapped joints are considered to be at the same section if the distance
between their centers does not exceed the required lap length.
Table 7.3 Values of al for Eq. 7.8 and 7.9
Distance Between Two Distance to Nearest Percentage of Reinforcement Lapped
Adjacent Laps Surface Within Required Lap Length
a b 20% 25% 33% 50% 100%
I a ~ 10~ and/or b ~ 5~ 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
a > 10~ and b > 5~ 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
, (2) The lap length 10 shall be at least equal to the basic anchorage length lb'
(3) The percentage of lapped bars in compression in anyone section may be 100% of the total steel
cross section.
(4) The separation of the bars at the joint shall be as small as possible and shall not exceed 4~ except
in slabs and walls. The distance between two adjacent laps shall be equal to: .
(a) In the transverse direction: 2~ ~ 20 mm (clear distance).
(b) In the longitudinal direction: 1.510 (center-to-center distance)
(5) Transverse forces in lapped joints shall be checked where
(a) ~ ~ 16 mm, or
(b) the joint affects more than one-half of the total area of the bars.
7.1.6.6 Additional Rules for Defonned Bars of Large Diameter (cp > 32 mm)
(1) Bars of Diameter ~ > 32 mm shall be used only in elements of thickness at least equal to 15 <p.
(2) When large bars are used at relatively wide spacings, skin reinforcement is requiroo for adequate
crack control.
(3) The design bond strengthfw from Section 7.5.1 shall be reducoo by the factor:
.132 -cp
(7
9) -
'7 100 .
where ~ is in mm.
80 EBCS 2 -1995
.CHAPTER 6: DETAILING PROVISIONS
--
(4) As a general rule only straight anchorage or mechanical anchorage is allowed. ,; i;
."
I I ~ ,
(5) Lap joints are not allowed at-joints. !! tt
ii,.
7.1.6.7 Additional RIdes for Bundled Bars f
(1) For design. bundles of bars containing n bars having the same diameter are replaced by a single ~.
notional bar having the same center of gravity. and an equivalent diameter: {
cPft .<Pfii ~ 55 mm (7.10)
where n is the number of bars in a bundle. which must be limited to
n ~ 4 for vertical bars in compression and for bars of a lapped joint
n ~ 3 for all other cases.
(2) The equivalent diameter cPft is taken into account in evaluating the minimum cover. However. the
cover provided shall be measured from the actual outside contour of the bundle.
(3) The anchora~es of the bars of a bundle can only be straight anchorages.
(4) The anchorage of a bundle is dependent upon the anchorage of the individual bars.
(5) The anchorages shall be staggered; for bundles of 2. 3. or 4 bars the staggering shall be
respectively. 1.2, 1.3 or 1.4 times the anchorage length of the individual bars.
(6) Joints can be made on only one bar at a time but at any section there shall be no more than four
bars in a bundle. The laps of the individual bars shall be staggered in accordance with Section
7.6.7.3
7.1.7 Curtailment of Longitudinal Flexural Reinforcement
7.1.7.1 Staggering Rule
(1) The tensile force diagram or M/z diagram for a flexural member shall be obtained by dividing
the moment diagram by the appropriate lever arm z and displacing the resulting curves horizontally
by the amounts a, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
;
I.
(2) The displacement a, depends on the spacing of potential shear cracks and may be taken as follows.
in the absence of more accurate determination:
(a) Members without shear reinforcement (e.g slabs) a, = 1.Od
(b) members with V.J < 2V. a, = O.75d
(c) members with V.J ~ 2V. a, = O.5Od
where V.J is the applied design shear force.
-(3) Near points of zero moment, a, ~ d shall be taken for both positive and negative moments.
EBCS 2 -~1
: i ir=:::::=1: ==
I I .
,
I I
I I I
L,.."...,c.., , I I I
e ~,f~~j'" '"
,
p line
envelop of the
~'L ' acting tensile
'I;. -' force
~
: diagram of the
I ! : I r..lttlng tensile
.I force
Figure 7.2 Tensile Force Diagram
7.1.7.2 Anchorage Length of Reinforcement
(1) Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at which it is no longer required to resist tension
for a length given by:
(a) Ib according to Eq. 7.3, or
(b) Ib".., ~ d according to Eq. 7.4 provided that in this case, the continuing bars are capable
of resisting twice the applied moment at the section.
(2) The anchorage length of bars that are bent up as shear reinforcem~nt shall be at least equal to
I.3/b".., in zones subjected to tension and to 0.7/b.,.., in zones subjected to compression.
7.1.7.3 Anchorage of Bottom Reinforcement at Supports
(3) At least one-quarter of the positive moment reinforcement in simple beams and one-half of the
positive moment reinforcement in slabs shall extend along the same face of the member into the
support.
(4) The anchorage of this reinforcement shall be capable of developing the following tensile force F,.
at
F, .VJd- ~ 0.5VJd (7.11)
d
(5) The anchorage length is measured from:
(a) The face of the support, for a direct support
(b) A plane inside the support located at a distance of 1/3 the width of the support from the face
of the support, for an indirect support.
(6) The anchorage length of the bottom reinforcement at intermediate supports shall be at lea.'it 10</>.
82 EBCS 2 -1995
.CHAPTER 6: DETAILING PROVISIONS J
;i
7.2 DETAILING OF STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ~
,
.I. :
7.2.1 Beams I i
(
! '
7.2.1.1 Longitudinal Reinforcement 1;i~
:;
(1) The geometrical ratio of reinforcement p at any section of a beam where positive reinforcement if
is required by analysis sha11 not be less than that given by \:
0 6 "l
-.j;~(
Plnin -_
.I: (7 .12) !~i;';
L "I:'
VA ...
, t,!
!It Ii
" C
c,~
v.
..'
where hk is in MPa. :i
!;
"
(2) In T -beams and joists where the web is in tension, the ratio p shall be computed for this purpose , It
using width of web. ,~i
t,!
(3) The maximum reinforcement ratio P..- for either tensile or compressive reinforcement shall be }; Ii
0 04 ' "t
..: :.;:
~f$
7.2.1.2 Shear Reinforcement :j}r!
kj;
(1) All beams, except joists of ribbed slabs, shall be provided with at least the minimum web ~t(
reinforcement given by: I~
-04 ,
P = ~ (7 .13) ;~'I
",,1nIn
f "1'
yk
~ . "
where /ykis in MPa. ~
(2) The maximum spacing Sw=betweenstirrups, in the longitudinal direction, shall be as givenbelow: "
.2 ~
Smax= 0.5d ~ 300 mm If V.oct ~ "3VRD (7.14) f
,
"
:
2 l
Smax= 0.3d ~ 200 mm if V.oct> -V Rd [[
3 (7.15) !lor'
"
(3) The transverse spacing of legs of stirrups shall not exceed d, or 800 mm, whichever is the :
smaller. ,
j
7.2.1.3 Torsional Reinforcement f
(1) The minimum web reinforcement given by Eq. 7.2 shall be provided in the form of closoo stirrups
for the caseof torsional reinforcement.
c,
t!
J
i ,
(2) The spacing of the stirrups shall not exceed Utl/S" i
-(3) The longitudinal bars required for torsion shr...! be distributed uniformly around the perimeter of ~ i
the closed stirrups at a spacing not exceeding 350 mIn. r;
i
-(4) At least one longitudinal bar shall be placed in each corner of the closed stirrups. !i
{i
"
'I
EBCS 2 -1995 83 r
:;:.- -,~ ,'"
", '.
!: , '.
I .1
4
7.2.2 Slabs
,
I 7.2.2.1 Thickness
:~:,
(1) The following minimum thicknesses shall be adopted in design:
(a) 60 rom for ~labs not exposed to concentrated loads (e.g inaccessible roofs)
, (b) 80 rom for slabs exposed mainly to distributed loads.
(c) 100 mm for slabs exposed to light moving concentrated loads (e.g slabs accessible to light
motor vehicles)
.(d) 120 rom for slabs exposed to heavy dynamic moving loads (eg. slabs accessible to heavy
vehicles)
(e) 150 rom for slabs on point supports (e.g flat slabs)
7.2.2.2 Flexural Reinforcement
(1) The ratio of the secondary reinforcement to the main reinforcement shall be at least equal to 0.2.
(2) The geometrical ratio of main reinforcement in a slab shall not be less tha-'!.:
0.5
P",;,. = -;:- (7.16)
Jyt
where ht is in MPa.
(3) The spacing between main bars for slabs shall not exceed the smaller of 2h or' 350 rnm.
(4) The spacing between secondary bars shall not exceed 400 mm.
7.2.3 Hollow or Ribbed Slabs
7.2.3.1 Sizes
(I) Ribs shall not be less than 70 mm in width; and shall have a depth, excluding any topping, of not
more than 4 times the minimum width of the rib. The rib spacing shall not exceed 1.0 m.
(2) Thickness of topping shall not be less than 40 mm, nor less than 1/10 the cleat. distance between
ribs.
7.2.3.2 Minimum Reinforcement
(3) The topping shall be provided with a reintl)rcement me-~h providing in each direction a cross-
sectional area not less than 0.001 of the section of the slab.
(4) If the rib spacing exceeds 1.0 m, the topping shall be designed as a slab resting on ribs,
considering load conceritrations, if any.
(5) The web-flange connections shall be checked in accordance with Section 4.5.5. -
84 EBCS 2 -1995
1t,~Z
.
.CHAPTER 6: DET A/LING PRO \,'/S/ONS
"1.2.3,] Tramvers~ Ribs
,.
.:
(1) Transverse ribs shall be piavided if the span of the ribbed slab exceeds 6.0 m. J'\
ii !
i I
(2) When transverse ribs are provided, the center-to-center distance shall not exceed 20 times the .II,
,)verall depth of the ribbed slCib. ; :ji
i.,
(3) The transverse ribs shall be designed for at least half the values of maximum moments and shear !
force in the longitudinal ribs. ;
..
7.2.4 Columns :
1.2.4.1 Size
(1) The minimum lateral dimension of a column shall be at least 150 mrn.
7,2.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
(1) The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall not be less than 0.008Ac nor more than 0.08Ac' The
upper limit shall be observed even where bars fJverlap.
(2) For columns with a larger cross-section than rcquired by considerations of loading, a reduced
effective area not less than one-half the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement
:md design strength.
(3) The minimum numb~r of longitudinal reinforcing bars shall be 6 for bars in a circular arrangement
and 4 for bars in a rectangular arrangement.
(4) The diameter of longitudinal bars shall not be less than 12 mrn.
'; .2.4.3 Lateral Reinforcement
(I) The diameter of ties or spirals 5hall not be less than 6 mrn or one quarter of the diameter of the
longitudinal bars.
(2) '!be center-to~center spacing of lateral reinforcement shall not exceed:
(a) 12 times the minimum diameter of longitudinal bars.
(b) least dimension of column
(c) 300 mrn
(3) Ties shall be arranged such that every bar or group of bars placed in a corner and alternate
longitudinal bar shall have laterai support provided by the corner of a tie with an included angle of
not more than 1350 and no bar shall be further than 150 mm clear on each side along the tie from
such a laterally supported bar (see Fig. 7.3).
". I.
.(4) Up to five longitudinal bars in each corner may be secured against lateral buckling by means of
the main ties. The center.to--center distance between the oute!"most of these bars and the corner bar
shall not exceed 15 times the diameter of the tie (sf'~ Fig. 7.4).
-'
: S = 350 mm
-
t (5) Spirals or circular ties may be used for longitudinal bars located around the perimeter of a circle.
1 The pitch of spirals shall not exceed 100 mm.
i." -EBCS 2. 1995 8S
/,
-~
I
-~~--~ ~ .
Equal or less than 150 mm
Equal or .
an 150 :nm
,
May be ~reater than 150 mm
No intermediate tie required
Figure 7.3 Measurements Between Laterally SUDDorted Cnhlmn Bars
~I. Longitudinal bars
ctlt. Main ties
Intermediate
E tIe
E
0
0
~
"
..4: -
C
VI
~18~\~ ~ 500 mm oo!
Figure 7.4 Requirements for Main and Intermediate Ties
7.2.5 WALLS
7.2.5.1 Sizes
(1) The thickness of load bearing walls shall not be less than 1/25 of the unsupported height or width,
whichever is shorter, nor less than 150 mm.
(2) The overall thIckness of panel and partition walls shall not be less than 1/30 of the distance
between supporting or enclosing members, nor less than 100 mm.
7.2.5.2 Veltical Reinforcement
(1) The area of vertical reinforcement shall not be less than O.OO4A, nor more than O.04Ac. The .
upper limit shall be observed even where bars overlap.
(2) For walls with a larger cross-section than required by considerations of loading, a reduced
effective area not less than one-half the total area may be used to determine minimum reinforcement
aOO design strength.
86 EBCS 2 -1995 -
r 1
(3) The diamd;er of vertical bars shall not be less than 8 mm. !..
,,'
..-(4) The s~ing of vertical bars shall not exceed twice the wall thickness nor 300 mm. \,
7.2.5.3 Horlr.olltal Reiiiforctmellt ~\j
~ 1-
(1) The area of horizontal reinforcement shall not be less than one-half of that of the vertical illJ':r
reinforcement. I, :!'
-(2) The spacing of horizontal bars shall not exceed 300 mIn. The diameter of horizontal bars shall
00t be less than one quarter of that of the vertical bars. \, ..f
(3) Horizontal reinforcement shall; enclose the vertical reinforcement. The horizontal bars shall be ~:
tied to the vertical bars so as to form a rigid mat.
'til 'I
1
7.2.5.4 TransJ'erse Reinforctmen! .~j R
(1) The mats at the two faces of a wall shall be connected to each other by at least 4 transverse S-ties ~
per m2. when the diameter of the vertical reinforcement is 16 rom or greater. it'
(2) If the area of required reinforcement exceeds O.OU.. then ties as required for columns (see
Section 7.2.4.3) shall be provided.
7.2.6 Deep Beams ;
.7.2.6.1 11aidness t
I
j.c:
.(1) The thickness of deep beams shall not be less than 100 rom. ' : !
i 7.2.6.2 Supplementary Reinforcement
;
,
i (1) To supplement the main reinforcement, one layer of mesh reinforcement shall be provided near
each face of deep beams. The minimum percentage of reinforcement of each mesh in each direction -
shall be given by:
0.3
P- = 7; (7.17)
wherefyt is in MFa.
(1) The spacing between adjacent bars shall not exceed twice the thickness of the deep beam or
300 mIn.
EBCS 2 -1995 87
7.2.7 Corbels
(1) The reinforcement, corresponding to the ties considered in the design model (Section 6.4), should
be fully anchored beyond the node under the bearing plate by using V-hoops or anchorage devices
unless a length Ib./It, is available between the node and the front of the corbel. The length Ib./It, should
be measured from the point where the compression stresses change their direction.
(2) In corbel with hc ~ 300 mm, when the area of the Qrimary horizontal tie AJ is such that
O.4A Iii
, AJ ~ f (7.18)
(where Ac is the sectional area of the concrete in the corbel at the column), then closed stirrups,
having a total area not less than O.4AJ' should be distributed over the effective depth d in order to
cater for splitting stresses in the concrete strut. They can be placed either horizontally (Fig. 7.5(a)
or inclined (Fig. 7.5(b)).
Fy Fy
A
s looped
stirrups
~ Q.4 As
stirrups
! 0.4 As
Fi~ure 7.5 Reinforcement of a Corbel
88 EBCS 2. 1995
,.-- -, ,\
.CHAPTER 8 I'
.MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP \
:~
II
i'
I'
8.1 SCOPE If;
,.
'1
(1) This Chapter provides minimum specification requirements for materials and for the .standard of Ii
!~
workmanship that must be achieved on site in order to ensure that the design assumptions in this Code ii:, .
are valid and hence that the intended levels of safety and of durability will be attained. Th'1 .
"
It '
(2) This Chapter is neither intended as, nor extensive enough for, a contract document. II: ;.
!.~'.!
8.2 SPECIF1CATION OF CONCRETE i~.i:
if: \
8.2.1 Methods of Specifying Concrete j,!
l~j
(1) Concrete may be specified in one of three ways: "i ~!'
~I,
I-C
, (a) ~igned mix~: With this method the required compressive strength is specified, together
),;! with any other limits that may be required, such as maximum aggregate size, minimum .:
cement content, and workability, ~f
(b) Pr~cribed mixes: With this method, the designer assumes responsibility for designing the f
mix and stipulates to the producer the mix proportions and the materials which shall be '
\\
employed. ~
.(c) Standard (or Nominal) mixes: The mix proportions which are appropriate for grades C5 to l
C30 may be taken from Table 8,1. These standard mixes which are rich in cement, and are I
intended for use where the cost of trial mixes or of acceptance cure te.sting is not justified,
.may be used without verification of compressive strength by testing.
(2) The limitation on constituent materials given in Section 8,2.2 shall be complied with.
8.2.2 Constituent Materials or Concrete
8.2.2.1 Cement
(1) The cement used shall be Portland or Portland-Pozzolana cement complying with the requirements
of the latest Ethiopian Standards'on such cements.
(2) Where cements other than those complying with these standards are used, account shall be taken
of their properties and any particular conditions of use.
8.2.2.2 Aggregates
(1) In general agireiates shall comply with the requirements of the latest Ethiopian Standard~ for
aggregates.
8.2.2.3 Water
-(1) M!xing water shall be clean and free from harmful matter.
EBCS 2 -1995 89
--'"
E
T
H
I
O
P
I
A
N

B
U
I
L
D
I
N
G

C
O
D
E

S
T
A
N
D
A
R
D

F
O
R

S
T
R
U
C
T
U
R
A
L

U
S
E

O
F

C
O
N
C
R
E
T
E

.
!

0

-
,
d

I
I
')

1
1
')
-

1
1
')
0

1
I
')
t
"
-
-
O
J
)

O
I
l
')
N

1
1
')
1
1
')
-

0
1
1
')
0
\
.
-
.
9

I

I

0

1

-
t
"
-
-

I

-
I
I
')

1

0
:
I
:

N
i
l
'
)
'

-
I
I
'
)

.
-
I
I
'
)

.
~

~
O

~
O

~
O
0 -
e

I
I
'
)

0

0

0
3

N

O
l
l
'
)
t
"
-
-

O
l
l
'
)
~

0
1
l
'
)
8
i
'

:
a
.
9

I

I

~
I
~
_
'
~
(
X
J
I
-
4
)

N
O

.
N
O

.
-
0

.
~

~

~
O

~
O

~
O
.
w C O
J
e
0

0
0
0
O
J

~

1
0

O
l
l
'
)
g

I
I
'
)
I
I
'
)
~

O
l
l
'
)
;
g
U
.
-
.
9

I

I

N

1

-
0
\

1

-
t
"
-
-

I

-
:
I
:

N
O

.
-
0

.
-
0

.
0

~
O

~
O

~
O
=

r
.
-
,
O
t
)

'o
t
"
~

-
=
O
t
)

e

g

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)
~
.
=

I
I
'
)

~

~

0

~

g

I
I
'
)

~

~
=

-
0
.
9

I

I

I
I
'
)

1

-
N

I

-
0
\

1

-
I
r
J

4
)

N
i
l
'
)
'

N
i
l
'
)
'

-
I
I
'
)

.
~

~

~
~
.

r
.
-
,
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
0
C

x
.
~

O
J
~

~

<
:
:
>
C

~

0

0

0

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)
C
,
J

~

~

-
O
l
l
'
)
~

O
l
l
'
)
~

O
~
~

1
I
'
)
~
r
;
:
-
.

O
~
~
=

,
-

0

(
X
J

1

N

(
X
J

1

-
I
I
'
)

1

-
-
1

-
0
\

1

-
)
.
.

U

:
I
:

-
~
I
I
'
)
O

N
I
I
'
)
O

N
I
I
'
)
O

N
I
I
'
)
O

-
1
1
'
)
0
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
I
I
')
~

=
~

~

0
~

=

N

.
0

"
g
e
o
'
.

~

I
I
'
)

0

t
"
-
-

0

(
X
J

0

1
0

0

t
"
-
-

0

~
O
)
.
w

.
=

0

I
I
'
)

t
"
-
-

0

I
I
'
)

t
"
-
-

0

~

I
I
'
)

0

~

r
.
-
,

0

~

N
.
.
.
r
-
'
J

-
0
.
9

~
I
N

N
I
-

(
X
J
I
-

~
I
-

-
1
-
~

4
)

1
1
'
)
1
1
'
)

.
r
.
-
,
1
I
'
)

.
N
O

.
N
O

.
N
O

.
.
~

t
'

~

R
I

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
o

r
.
-
,
o
Q
.

=
~

.
.
g

.
(
J

~

0
O
N

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)

0

0

0
,
d

-
O
~
I
I
'
)
O
~
r
.-
,
O
~
II')

~
t"
-
-

~
t"
-
-
O
J
)

t"
-
-

(
X
J

II')

0

r
.-
,
II')

N
~

.
-
0

I
I
'
)

1

N

r
.
-
,

1

-
t
"
-
-

1

-
~

1

-
-
I

-
.
E

:
I
:

-
1
1
'
)
0

.
r
.
-
,
o

.
N
O

.
N
O

.
N
O

.
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
0

r
.
-
,
0
~

1
0
.
~

~
~
~
0 1
0

I
I
'
)
N

I
I
'
)

1
1
'
)
1
1
'
)

1
I
'
)
t
"
-
-

I
I
'
)
~
'
0

.
-
0

~

-
0

~

8

I
I
'
)

r
.
-
,

1
0

I
I
'
)

r
.
-
,

~

I
I
'
)

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
~

-
0
.
9

~

,
~

t
"
-
-

1

N

0

,
-

1
0

,
-

r
.
-
,
1
-
=

4
)

1
0
0

r
.
-
,
o
.

r
.
-
,
o

.
N
O

.
N
O

.
]

~

~

r
.
-
,
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
0

r
.
-
,

r
.
-
,
=
.
w
r
-
'
J
"

"

"

-
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
.
.
,
~
,
~

"

e

e

e

e

e

O
J

~
-
-
-

.
.
'
U

'
U

'
U

'
U

'
U
:
0

.
~

~

o
S

-
.
-
~

~

~

~

~
~

C
o

&
-
0

-
-
-
u

-
-
-
u

-
-
-
u

-
-
-
u

-
-
-
u
r
-
i
.
-
E
:

1
)

O
J
)
,
,

C

O
J
)
,
,

C

~

-
-
-
c

O
J
)

-
-
-
C

0
4
1

-
-
-
C
~

~

=
-

~
~
o

~
~
o

~
~
o

~
~
o

~
~
o
.
.
&
J

-
~

-
.
-
u

-
.
-
u

-
.
-
u

-
.
-
u

-
.
-
u
~

.
'
"

~

'
U

'
U

'
U

'
U

'
U
1
~

~

.
.
.
~

.
.
~
]

.
.
~
~

.
.
~
~

"
i
G
~
~

-
~
~
~

0

'U

O
J
)
~
,
d

~
~
,
d

~
~
,
d

~
~
~

~
~
,
d
,

~

c
I
\

O
J
)

'"

0
4
1

'"

~

'"

O
J
)

'"
O
J
)

~

.
~
.
!

~

~
'a

~

~

'a

~

~
'a

~

~
'a

~

~

'a
0
'
:
:

8

~
O
j
)
~

~
~
~

~
O
j
)
~

~
0
4
I
1
o
.
:

~
0
4
I
1
o
.
:

.
Z
o

;
:
:
I
i

'
0

'
0

'
0

'
0

'
0
3
'
U
~

3
'
U
~

'
3
'
U
~

3
'
U
~

3
'
U
~
0

.
9

0

0
.
9

0

0
.
5

0

0
.
9

0

0
.
9

0
f
-
u
.
.
>

f
-
u
.
.
>

f
-
u
.
.
>

f
-
u
.
.
>

f
-
u
.
.
>
u
-
u
~

~

I
I
'
)

I
I
'
)

0

I
I
'
)

0
u

~

-
N

N

r
.
-
,
8

0

u

u

u

u

u

.
u
9
0

E
B
C
S

2
.

1
9
9
5

.
.,,'
CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
.
8.2.2.4 Admixtures
..
(1) Suitable admixtures may be used in concrete mixes, in special cases, with the prior approval of
the engineer. i"
il;
(2) Many admixtures are highly active chemicals and may impart undesirable as well as desirable lli.
pro~erties to th~ concrete; th:ir suitability. shall generally be verified by trial mixes. Chlorides, in \r:~
I~ particular, may Increase the risk of corrosion. 111 ~
t';: !
8.2.3 Composition or the Concrete m, l
1" II
I f'
1, i.:\
(1) The choice of the constituents and of their mix proportions shall be such as to satisfy requirements 1~: "j
concerning: j~li'
~"
(a) The properties of the fresh concrete (see Section 8.2.4 to 8.2.6) ~
(b) The specified properties of the, hardened concrete (strength or other limit requirements, see
Section 8.2.1)
(c) The durability, taking account of the conditions of exposure. In particular, the total content ~,~
of deleterious substances shall be restricted. I:
f'.'
8.2.4 Requirements or Fresh Concrete t.
fj.
8 2 4 1 1~' '-
ahil.r ..."orA tty r.
~ ,
;..
(1) The workability of the fresh concrete shall be such that the concrete is suitable for the conditions
.of handling and placing so that after compaction it surrounds all reinforcement and completely fills
the formwork.
8.2.4.2 Temperature
..
(1) Where the minimum dimension of concrete to be placed at a single time is greater than 600 mm !
and especially where the cement content is likely to be 400 kg/m3 or more, measures to reduce the
temperature, such as the selection of a cement type with a slower release of heat of hydration shall
be considered. In exceptional cases other measures to reduce the temperature or to remove evolved ;1
heat may be necessary. f
f
8.2.5 Hot Weather Concreting I
(
8.2.5.1 General ~
(1) Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and
wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in
abnormal properties. The effects of hot weather are most critical during periods of rising
temperature, falling relative humidity, or both.
(2) Hot weather introduces problems in preparation, placing, and curing cement concrete that can
adversely affect tl1~ properties and serviceability of the hardened concrete.
l' 8.2.5.2 Placing of Concrete
(1) If concrete temperatures as placed are expected to be abnormally. high, preparation shall be made
to place, consolidate and finish the concrete at the fastest possible rate. :
.EBCS 2 -1995 91
1"':'
, :;,
"',
",(
, ,-'"
I
-'
.
(2) For best assurance of good results with concrete placing in hot weather, the initial concrete
placement should be limited between 25C and 40C. Every effort shall be made to keep the concrete
temperature uniform. ..
(3) Under extreme conditions of high ambient temperature, exposure to direct rays of t.~e sun, low
relative humidity, and wind, it is suggested to restrict concrete placement to late afternoon or evening.
8,2.5.3 Curing of Concrete
,
(1) In hot weather there is great need for continuous curing, preferably by water. The need is
gr,eatest during the first few hours, and throughout the first day after the concrete is placoo.
(2) In hot weather, forms shall be covered and kept moist. The forms shall be loosened, as soon as
this can be done without damage to concrete, and provisions made for the curing water to rtJD down
inside them. During form removal, care shall be taken to provide wet cover to newly exposed
surfaces to avoid exposure to hot sun and wind. At the end of the prescribed curing period (10 days
is recommended), the covering shall be left in place without wetting for at least four days, so that the
concrete surface will dry slowly and be less subject to surface shrinkage cracking.
8.2.6 Minimum Cement Content
(1) One of the main characteristics influencing the durability of any concrete is its permeability,
(2) With strong, dense aggregates, a suitably low permeability is achieved by having a sufticil;ntly
low water/cement ratio, by ensuring complete compaction of the concrete, and by ensuring suftl'::.ient
hydration of the cement through proper curing methods. .
(3) The cement content shall be sufficient to provide adequat~ workability with low water/cement ratio.
so that the concrete can be completely compacted with the means available.
(4) Tahle 8.2 gives the minimum cement ~l)ntent required and maximum nt:t water/l.:em~nt ratio
re~l)mmended, when u5ing a partil:ular size of aggregate in Pl)rtland I:emt:nt I:l)nl:rete, to pro...ide
a~~eptahle durahility under the apprl)priate ~l)nditions l)f eXpl)$Ure.
(5) ~rh~ cement I.:llntent~ in Table 8.2 may be redu~~d by 20kg/m:l when trial mixes have verifi~ that
a Cl)nl.:rete with a maximum net wat~r/~ement ratil) nl)t greater than that given for the particular
conditil)n. can he I.:l)n~i~tt:ntly prl)duct:d and that it i~ ~uitahle fl)r the cl)nditil)ns l)f plai:ing and
i:ompactil)n.
8.2.7 Muximum Cement Cuntl'nt
(I) Cem~nt I.:ontl.:nt~ in t:XI.:~~~ l)f 550 kg/m:l ~hall ",It be u~ed unle~s ~pel.:ial consid~ratil)n has b~en
givt:n in d~~ign tll th~ ini:rt:iI~l.:d ri~k l)f I:ral:king du~ tl) drying shrinkage in thin ~~I;til)n~ l)r to thermal
~trt:~!\I.:!\ in thii:kl.:r !\I.:i:tilln~.
92 EBCS 2. 7995
~ 1!
CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP ! i
,
,
!'f; r Table 8.2 Minimum Cement Content per mJ or Concrete to Ensure Durability under
.' .-Specifi~ Conditions or Exposure
Reinforced Concrete Plain Concrete
Nominal Maximum Size Nominal Maximum Size
Exp<)su~ of Aggt'Cgate Max of Aggregate Max
w/c w/c
40 30 20 10 40 30 20
Mild: E.g. Completely pro-
tected against weather, or
aggressive conditions, except
for a brief period of exposure
to nonnal weather conditions
during construction 230 260 280 300 0.65 220 230 260 280 0.70
Moderate: E.g. Sheltered
from sever rain. Buried
concrete and concrete contin- .
uous under water 270 300 330 350 0.55 230 260 290 310 0.60
Sever: E.g. Exposed to sea
water, driving main alternate
wetting and drying. Subject
to heavy condensation or
comJsive fumes
330 420 0.45 0.50
~'!J 8.3 SPECIFICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
8.3.1 Basic requirements
(1) Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of Sections 2.6 to 2.10 of this Code,
Reinforcing steel shall comply with the requirements of the latest Ethiopian Standards for
reinforcement.
(2) Only steel specified in the design documents may be used as reinforcements.
8.4 CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION RULES
8.4,1 General
(1) The supervision employed shall be such as to ensure the required standard of control over
materials and workmanship. The engineer shall be afforded all reasonable opportunity and facility
to inspect the materials and the manufacture of concrete and to take any samples or to make any
tests. All such inspection, sampling and testiIlg shall be carried out with the process of manufacture
and delivery.
8.4,2 Handling and Storage or the Materials used Cor Making Concrete
iJ~
8.4.2.1 Cement
-(1) Cement shall be transported and stored in clean containers and protected from moisture both in
transit and during storage.
; (2) Provision shall be made to prevent accidental mixing of different types.
-
EBCS 2 -1995
.
8.4.2.2 Aggregates
(1) Aggregates shall be handled and stored so as to minimize segregation and contamination with
undesirable constituents. Separate storage facilities with adequate provision for drainage shall be
provided for each different nominal size of aggregate used.
8.4.3 Batching and Mixing
,
(1) The mixing shall be carried out in such a way that the constituent materials are uniformly
distributed and the mixture has uniform workability.
(2) The quantity of cement, the quantity of fine aggregate and the quantities of the various sizes of
coarse aggregates shall be measured by weight except that aggregates may be measured by volume
for Class II Concrete or for standard mixes.
(3) The batch weights of aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for a moisture content typical of the
aggregates being used.
8.4.4 Transporting, Placing and Compacting
(1) Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by methods
which will prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients, and maintain the required
workability. It shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling.
(2) All placing and compacting shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a competent
member of the contractor's (or manufacturer's) staff. Class I concrete of grades C20 and above shall
be compacted by using vibrators.
(3) Concrete shall be placed soon after mixing and thoroughly compacted during the operation of
placing. It shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, tendons or duct formers, around
embedded fixtures and into corners of formwork to form a solid mass free from voids.
(4) Care shall be taken to avoid the displacement of re~nforcement or movement of formwork and
damage to faces of formwork.
(5) The depth of lift to be concreted shall be determined by the contractor or the manufacturer in
consultation with the engineer.
(6) In order to avoid segregation, the free fall of concrete mass shall be restricted to a maximum of
three meters unless the system of placing concrete is approved by the designer.
(7) When vibrators are used to compact the concrete, vibration shall be applied continuously during
the placing of each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner
which does not promote segregation of the ingredients.
(8) The mix shall be such that there will not be excess water on the top surface on completion of
compaction.
8.4.5 Construction Joints
(1) The number of construction joints shall be kept as few as possible consistent with reasonable
precauti(;t.., against shrinkage. Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to construction joints.
94 EBCS 2 -1995
'r~
.-CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANS~
(2) Where it is necessary to introduce construction joints, careful consideration shall be given to their
exact location, which shall be indicated on the drawings. Alternatively, the location and details of
. : joints shall be subject to the agreement between the engineer and the contractor before any work
: commences. Construction joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the member .and
shall take due account of shear and other stresses.
I (3) Particular care shall be taken in the placing of the new concrete close to the joint. The surface
of concrete construction joints shall be thoronghly cleaned and laitance removed. Immediately before
new concrete is placed, all construction joints shall be wetted and standing water removed.
! 8.4.6 Formwork
':!."iI:&~ 8.4.6.1 Basic RequiremenJs
1~".
",. c'
,'i~~ \ (1) Formwork and falsework shall be designed and constructed so that they are capable of resisting
,,:; i all actions which may occur during the construction process. They shall remain undisturbed until the
..1 concrete has achieved sufficient strength to withstand the stresses to which it will be subjected on
;} , stripping or release, with an acceptable margin of safety.
(2) The. formwork and falsework shall be sufficiently stiff and tight to ensure that the tolerances for
the structure are satisfied and that its loadbearing capacity is not affected and to prevent loss of grout
or mortar from the concrete at all stages and for the appropriate method of placing and compacting.
(3) The gene1:allay-out of the formwork shall be such that the correct placing of reinforcement as well
as correct compaction of the concrete is possible.
(4) The formwork and the falsework shall be designed and erected by suitably trained persons.
Supervision and control shall be such as to ensure that the erection is completed in accordance with
the drawings and specifications.
(5) The formwork shall be capable of being removed from the concrete without causing shock or
damage.
(6) Where necessary, the camper built into the formwork should be that required by the designer of
the structure and falsework.
(7) Ground support for the falsework should also be constructed by suitably trained personnel in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Deformations and displaceIilents imposed by
prestressing should be taken into account in the design of the falsework.
(8) Joints between the panels of the formwork should be adequately tight.
(9) The internal surface of the formwork must be clean. Approved mould-release agents should be
applied in continuous and uniform layers on the internal surface and the concrete should then be
placed while these agents are still effective. Any possible detrimental influence of these agents on the
concrete surface has to be taken into consideration.
(10) Formwork spacers left in the concrete should not impair its durability or appearance.
~ .
'c EBCS 2 -1995 95
I .~
(1) The fonnwork shall be designed and constructed so that there is no loss of fines, or blemish of
the concrete surface.
(2) Where a particular grade or ty-pe of finish is required for practical or aesthetic reasons, the
requirements shall be specified directly or by reference to appropriate national or international
, documents or by sample surfaces.
8.4.6.3 Temporary Work Inserts
(1) Temporary works inserts may be necessary to assist in maintaining formwork,
reinforcement or ducts or other similar items, in place until the concrete has hardened.
(2) Such inserts shall not introduce unacceptable loading on the structure, shall not react harmfully
with the constituents of the concrete or reinforcement, and shall not produce unacceptable surface
blemishes.
8.4.6.4 Removal of Fonnwork and Falsework
(1) The formwork shall be removed slowly, as the sudden removal of wedges is equivalent to a shock
load on the partly hardened concrete.
(2) Thf- time at which forrnwork and falsework is removed shall be determined by consideration of.
the following criteria:
(a) The stresses that will be induced in the concrete when the formwork/falsework has been'
removed;
(b) The concrete strength at the time of removal;
(c) The ambient climatic conditions and the measures available to protect the concrete once the
formwork is removed;
(d) The presence, or otherwise, of re-entrant angle formwork, which should be removed as soon
as possible, while complying with other iemoval criteria.
(3) The formwork shall not be removed before the structure has gained enough strength to safely
carryall the possible loads. The time at which formwork is struck will be influenced by the
following factors:
(a) concrete strength
(b) stresses in the concrete at any stage in the construction period
(c) curing (Section 8.4.7)
(d) subsequent surface treatment requirements
(e) presence of re-entrant angles requiring formwork to be removed as soon as possible after
concrete has set to avoid shrinkage cracks.
(4) Provided the concrete strength is confirmed by tests on cubes stored as far as possible under the
same conditions, formwork supporting cast-in-situ concrete may be removed when the cube strength
is 50% if the nominal strength or twice the stress to which it will th;en be subjected whichever is
greater, provided that such earlier removal will not result in unacceptable deflections such as due to
shrinkage and creep.
96 EBCS 2 -1995
CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP :
(5) The time between casting and removal of the formwork de r
development of the concrete and on the function of the formwork. In the absence of more accurate :
data, the following minimum periods are recommended:
(a) For non-load bearing parts of formwork
(e.g. vertical formwork of b~; formwork for columns and walls) 18 hours
(b) For soffit fo~work to slabs 7 days
(c) For props to slabs 14 days
(d) For soffit formwork to beams 14 days
(e) For props to beams 21 days
(5) Where sliding or climbing form work is used, shorter periods than those recommended above may
be permitted.
8.4.7 Curing
(1) The methods of curing and their'duration shall be such that the concrete will have s~tisfactory
durability anq strength and the member will suffer a minimum of distortion, be free of excessive
efflorescence and will not cause, by its shrinkage, undue cracking in the structure.
8.S REINFORCING STEEL CONSTRUCTION RULES
8.S.1 Transport, Storage and Fabrication of the Reinforcement
(1) Steel reinforcing bars, welded mesh reinforcement and prefabricated reinforcement cages shall be
transported, stored, bent and placed in position so that they do not suffer any damage.
(2) The surface condition of the reinforcement shall be examined prior to use, to ensure that it is free
from deleterious substances which may adversely affect the steel or concrete or the bond petween
them.
(3) Reinforcing steel shall be cut and bent in accordance with appropriate international or national
standards.
(4) The following should be avoided:
(a) Mechanical damage (e.g. notches of dents);
(b) Rupture of welds in prefabricated reinforcement cages and in welded fabrics;
(c) Surface deposits damaging bond properties;
(d) Lack of identification of reinforcement;
(e) Reduction of the section through corrosion, beyond certain permissible limiting values.
8.S.2 Surface Condition
Reinforcement shall not be surrounded by concrete unless it is free from mud, oil, paint, retarders,
loose rust, loose mill scale, grease or any other substance which can be shown to affect adversely the
steel or concrete chemically, or reduce bond.
8.5.3 Welding
(1) Welding must only be carried out on reinforcing steel that is suitable for welding.
(2) Welding connections must be made and checked by persons suitably trained in welding of
reinforcement.
EBCS 2 -1995 97
,~
"
(3) Welding shall be used in accordance with international or national standards.
(4) Where a risk of fatigue exists, the welding of reinforcement must conform to special ~equirements
as given in relevant standards.
",/
'"
(5) The production and checking of the welded connections shall comply with the relevant
requiremen~ in international or national standards.
(6) Welding methods permitted include:
(a) electric flash welding;
(b) electric resistance welding
(c) electric arc welding (with coated electrodes or under a protective gas envelope);
(d) high pressure gas welding.
8.5.4 Joints
(1) The lengili and position of lapped joints ~hall be in accordance with the design and the drawings.
If the bar lengths delivered to the site do not conform with the drawings, then modifications shall only
be introduced with the apPi'OVal of the designer or of the supervisory authority.
(2) -In general, reinforcing bars shall not be welded at or near bends in a bar.
j 8.5.5 Fabrication, &sembly and Placing or the Steel
, (1) The assembly of the reinforcement shall be robust enough to ensure that the bars do not shift their
I prescribed position during transportation, placing and concreting. The specified cover to the
reinforcement shall be maintained by the use of approved chairs and spacers.
-'~
(2) The tolerances required for the fiXing of reinforcement shall be as given in Section 8.2.
Alternatively, they shall be stated in the contraCt documents.
(3) Bending should be carried out by mechanical methods, at constant speed without jerking, with the
aid of mandrels so that the bent part has a constant curvature. If the ambient temperature is .tower th_an
a specified value, additional precautions may b:e needed.
{4) The reinforcement shall be secured against any displacement and the position of the reinforcement
shall be checked before concreting.
(5) In areas of conge$ted reinforcement, sufficient spacing of the bars shall be provided to allow
proper compaCtion of the concrete.
8.6 TOLERANC~
8~6.1 General
(1) In order to ensure the requiroo properties of the structure, the tolerances must be clearly defined
before construction work starts.
(2) For durability reasons, independently from the defined tolerances, the cover to reinforcements
shall Dot be less than the minimum values given in Section 7.1.
(3) The dimensions given on the working drawings shall be observed with the appropriate tolerance.
EBCS 2 -1995
CHAPTER 8: MA TERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
..
8.6.2 Tolerances with regard to Structural Safety
~
(1) The following permitted deviations ~ with respect to the nominal cross sectional dimenSion l' can
.(except for concrete cover, see Section 8.6.3 below) be regarded as admissible on the basis of the
partial safety coefficients 'rF and 'rAi as given in Sections 3.5.3.1 and 3.6.1, respectively.
(2) In relation to the dimensions of the concrete section (total depth of a beam or of a slab, widtli of
a beam or web, lateral dimensions of a column) and in relation to the effective depth:
for 1 ~ 150 mm
~ = :I: 5 mm (8.1).
for 1 ~ 400 mm
..~ = :I: 15 mm (8.2)
:.
h'
1":
~ for 1 ~ 2500 mm
~ = :I: 30 mm (8.3)
with lin~ interpolation for other values of I.
(3) Tolerances other than those defined in (1) above can also be specified provided that it can be
demonstrated that they do not reduce the required level fo safety.
8.6.3 Tolerances for Concrete Cover
(1) For the tolerances of concrete covet to reinforcement, e.g. the difference between the nominal and
the minimum cover, Section 7.1 (8) applies. No positive permitted deviation is specified.
8.6.4 Tolerances for Construction Purpos~
(1) For other purposes, e.g. construction or dimensional tolerances in buildings as a whole, stricter
tolerances than defined is Section 8.6.2 may required. These values should be specified separately
from this Code. For the maximum sag of slabs, however Section 5.2.2 (1) and (2) apply.
;
t
EBCS 2 -1995 ~
\
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
..
4
.
.
,
100 EBCS 2 -1995
"~"-"c:c
.CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL
p
CHAPTER 9
,
J QUALITY CONTROL
9.1 DEFINITIONS
(1) Quality Control: Comprises a combination of actions and decisions taken in compliance with
! specifications and checks to ensure that these are satisfied. Quality control consists of two distinct,
I but intercoriDected parts, namely production control and compliance control.
(2) Production Control: Comprises a combination of actions and decisions taken during production
, to check the operation and to obtain a reasonable assurance that the specifications will be satisfied.
'
I' (3) Compliance Control: Comprises a combiLation of actions and decisions, in accordance with
; ; compliance rules adopted in advance, to check the compliance of the product with the specifications.
9.2 PRODUCTION CONTROL
9.2.1 Inspection of Materials
-(1) Inspection of materials on site shall be made at delivery to check compliance with the
specifications and the requirements of this Code (Chapter 8).
.9.2.2 Inspection Prior to Concreting
(1) This inspection shall be made to check:
, (a) the rigidity of the scaffolding and shuttering
i (b) the leak-tightness of joints between formwork elements
r (c) conformity of the dimensions of the formwork with the drawings
; (d) the cleanliness of the formwork
: (e) the surface condition of the reinforcement
i (f) the position and size of reinforcement
!i (g) the rigidity of the reinforcement securing systems, and the quality of the joints between bars.
9.2.3 Control of Mixing, Transportation and Placement of Concrete
(1) The accuracy of the mix proportions shall be checked regularly. The consistency of the fresh
concrete shall be checked periodically with the slump test.
(2) During concreting, checks shall be made on the deformations of the formwork and its supporting
.structure and on any leakage of water.
-9.2.4 Control for Curing the Concrete
(1) It must be checked that curing complies with approved method curing depending on the
environment and on any special requirements.
.
.EBCS 2 -1995 101
9.2.5 Information of Construction Procedures
(1) A site book shall be kept and for large structures, it shall contain the following information:
(a) dates on which concreting and stripping of formwork has taken place
(b) acceptance of materials and components
(c) results of tests and measurements
, (d) concrete mix used (type and origin of cement and aggregates)
(e) inspection and measurement reports of the positioning of reinforcement
(t) important instructions received
(g) description of any incidents.
9.3 COMPLIANCE CONTRO~
9.3.1 Compliance Controls for Concrete
(1) Compliance with specified properties of concrete shall be judged by tests made on proper
specimens at an age of 28 days unless there is evidence, satisfactory to the authority having
jurisdiction, that a particular testing regime is capable of predicting the strength at 28 days of concrete
tested at an earlier age, in which case compliance may be based on the results of such tests alone.
(2) The concrete for the specimen shall normally be taken when the concrete is actually being poured.
(3) Compliance of prescribed and standard mixes (Section 8.2) shall be based on checks made on the
mix properties (such as aggregate gradation, cement content, mix proportions, and workability); but,
because strength tests provide an implicit check on the quality of the mix, they may, alternatively,
be used for the acceptance of concretes made with prescribed and standard mixes.
9.3.1.1 Sampling and Testing Methods
(1) In general, it is sufficient to make only one test specimen from a single representative sample for
each mix of concrete. If more than one specimen is taken, the mix shall be considered as being
represented by the mean value of the test results obtained from the various specimens.
(2) Each mix from which a sample is taken shall be chosen at random from among the possible mixes.
(3) The samples shall, where practicable, be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer or, in the
case of ready-mix concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle.
1 9.3.1.2 Site of Lot and Frequency of Sampling
!
.(1) The lot is defined as the quantity of concrete produced in the same essential conditions and
subjected to individual assessment.
(2) The lots shall be defined before the commencement of construction, hy taking into account the
number of tests required for a decision (see Section 9.3.1.3) as well as the frequency of sampling and
I testing to be adopted.
,
I (3) The minimum rate of sampling shall be decided by the engineer taking into account the nature of
I the work. Higher rates would be appropriate at the start of the work, to establish quickly the level
I ' of quality, or during periods of production when quality is in doubt, or for highly-stressed structural.
I elements. i
,
("'
:"],;;", 102 EBCS 2. 1995
Y;,'""IJ;J:'j,,",~
!
.CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL
(4) In general, the following may be adopted as the minimum requirement on size of lot and i
.frequency of sampling, except for the special cases given hereunder: '1,
(a) No individual sampling can, represent, on the average, more than 100 mixes or 100 m',
whichever is the smaller volume of Concrete.
(b) For each grade of concrete, at least one sample shall be taken every week
(c) For each grad~ of concrete, at least tWo lots shall be made.
(4) Exception: For small buildings (e.g., having a total volume of less than)OO m3 of concrete) usinj,
concrete grade C30 or lower, Condition (3) need not be complied with.
9.3.1.3 Compliance Criteria
(1) Two compliance criteria are envisaged:
(2) Criterion 1: This criterion may'be applied in all cases but is less suited to large-scale sampling.
Each lot. is represented by three samples, the strength of which are XI < Xz < ~.
(3) The lot is accepted automatically if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
~ ~ fck + k1 (9.1)
1.1 ~ fck -k2 (9.2)
-where,
~ is the mean value
..f.k is the specified characteristic strength
kl, ~ are the margins of strength given in Table 9.1
1.1 is the average strength of the minimum strengths for the several lots.
Table 9.1 Margins or Strength in MPa
Margin of First Third and Fifth lot
Strength two lots fourth lot and above
kl 5 4 3
~ 1 2 3
(4) Criterion 2: This criterion is suitable for large lots.
1 (5) Each lot represented by not less than 15 test specimens (n ~ 15)
(6) The lot is accepted automatically if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
-m" -As" ~ fck (9.3)
1.1 ~ f.k -k2 (9.4)
-where,
1ft" is the mean value
s" is the standard deviation of the set of sample results
.f.k is the characteristic strength
EBCS 2 -1995 .103
.
.
A is the coefficient (may be taken as 1.4)
~ is the margin of strength (may be taken as 4 MPa)
n is the number of specimen
(7) If the test results do not satisfy the requirements of the selected acceptance criterion, measures
specified in Section 9.4 shall be taken.
,
9.3.2 Compliance Controls for the Completed Structure
(1) The acceptance of a completed structure involves a decision on each portion of the work subject
to acceptance (corresponding to the concrete lots) and a decision on the behavior of the .structure as
a whole.
9.4 MEASl~ TO BE TAKEN IN CASE OF NON-COMPLIANCE
9.4.1 General
(1) If the quality of the structure is found to be in doubt after an inspection or from the test results,-
then a special examination shall be made to verify the soundness of the information received and to
assess the actual strength of the structure as constructed with possible recourse to more accurate
methods of calculation.
9.4.2 Sequence of Measures
(1) The following sequential measures shall be taken where the results of compliance control tests or
inspection are unsatisfactory:
(a) The position of concrete which does not fulfil the oompliance criterion shall be identified.
(b) The structural safety shall be checked by appropriate calculations on the basis of the actual
test results which did not comply. If safety is assured, the concrete can be accepted.
(c) If such structural safety or durability are not assured, then the strength of the concrete shall
I be examined by taking drilled cores or by non-destructive methods (see Section 9.4.3). The
results of such tests shall be assessed on the basis of the prescribed acceptance criterion,
taking into account any differences in age.
(e) If this new information shows that structural safety is assured, the concrete may be accepted
after it has been decided whether repairs are necessary to ensure durability.
(t) If the results of check tests by non-destructive methods (3) show that the quality of concrete
is inadequate or show other defects, the engineer may require a loading test to be made which
shall then be carried out in accordance with Section 9.4.4.
(g) If structural safety and durability are not assured, then the possibility of strength~ning the
structure must be investigated. If strengthening is not feasible, then the concrete shall be
rejected, and the structure or member demolished or given a reduced structural grading by
limiting its service rating, as appropriate.
9.4.3 Check Tests on Structural Concrete
9.4.3.1 General
(1) Check tests by non-destructive methods are applicable to hardened concrete in the finish~ parts -
of a structure or in precast units. They may be used in routine inspection for quality control. They
are also of use when concrete is found defective from visual inspection and when lcw cube strengths
are obtained when assessing the strength of the concrete used. .
104 EBCS 2 .1995 -"'.
...
";;~;
"
, ~
!' ! !J
.
"I '
,00
CHAPTER 9: QUALITY CONTROL j I
rt, :
."
,
9.4.3.2 1)pes of Check Tests :"
(1) The following types of check tests may be used for different types of checks: l'
(a) Drilled Cores
,
(b) Gamma radiography
(c) Ultrasonic test
(d) Electromagnetic cover measuring devices
(e) Rebound hammer test.
(2) The tests must be conducted by appropriately trained personnel and the accuracy of each type of
tests must be considered in interpreting the results obtained.
9.4.4 Lnad Tests or Structure or Parts or Structures
,
9.4.4.1 General
(1) Test loads are to be applied and removed incrementally.
(2) The test should be carried out after th~ expiry of 28 days from the time of placing concrete.
When the test is for a reason other than the quality of the concrete in the structure being in doubt,
the test may be carried out earlier, provided that the concrete has already reached its specified
strength.
.
9.4.4.2 Test Loads
.(1) The test loads to be applied for the limit states of deflection and local damage are the appropriate
design loads, i.e., the characteristic dead and imposed loads.
(2) When the ultimate limit state is being considered, the test load shall be equal to the sum of the
characteristic dead load plus 1.25 times the characteristic imposed load and shall be maintained for
a period of 24 hours.
(3) If any of the final dead load is not in position on the structure, compensating loads shall be added
as necessary.
(4) During the test, struts and bracing, strong enough to support the v/hole load, shall be placed in
position leaving a gap under the members to be tested, and adequate precautions shall be taken to
safeguard persons in the vicinity of structure.
i 9.4.4.3 Measurements During the Tests
(1) Measurements of deflection and crack width shall be taken immediately after the application of
load and in the case of 24 hours sustained load test; at the end of the 24 hours loaded period, after
removal of the load and after the 24 hours recovery period. Sufficient measurements shall be taken
-to enable side effects to be taken into account. Temperature and weather conditions shall be recorded
during the test.
.
.
&Qr~ ? -"QQ~ 11\='
9.4.4.4 Assessment of Results
(1) In assessing the serviceability of a structure or part of a structure following a loading test, the
possible effects of variation in temperature and humidity during the period of the test shall be
COMidered.
~) The following requirements shall be met:
,
(a) The maximum width of any crack measured immediately on application of the test load for
local damage shall not be more than two-thirds of the value for the limit state requirement.
(see Section 5.3.4)
(b) For members spanning between two supports, the deflection measured immediately after
application of the test load for deflection is to be not more than 1/500 of the effective span.
Limits shall be agreed upon before testing cantilevered portions of structures.
(c) If the maximum deflection in millimeters observed during 24 hours under .load is less than
40 L.z/h where L. is ~ffective span in meter and h the overall depth of construction in
millimeters, it is not necessary for the recovery to be measured and the requirements in item
(d) below do not apply.
(d) If, within 24 hours of the removal of the t~t load for the ultimate limit state as calculated
in Section 9.4.4.2, a structure does not show a recovery of at least 75% of the maximum
deflection shown during the 24 hours under load, the loading shall be repeated. The structure
shall be considered to have failed to pass the test if the recovery after the second l<rading is
not at least 75% of the maximum deflection observed during the second loading.
,,/'
.
.
t 106 EBCS 2 -1995"
~ "e", c.'"
I
,}
1 '
APPENDIX A 1'1 t
, i
,
ANALYSIS OF SLABS!~
'\
'I
t!
A.t SCOPE Ii
(1) This appendix provides methods of analysis for one-way slabs, two-way slabs and flat slabs which !
are based on the principles set out on Section 3.8.
A.2 ONE-WAY SLABS
A.2.t General
(1) One-way slabs transmit their load mainly in one direction (i.e. the direction of span). There is
no need to analyze the action effects transverse to the direction of span arising as a result of restrained
lateral stra,in .or the transverse disttibution of concentrated or line loads, or caused by a support
parallel to the direction of span, which has not bean taken into account in the calculation. These
effects shall, however, be taken into account by making suitable detailing provisions.
A.2.2 D,is~ributi,O;n of Concentrated Loads
(1) The width of slab which may be assumed to be effective in carrying a concentrated load may be
taken as follows:
.(a) For solid slabs, the effective width may be taken as the sum of the load width and 2.4x(1-x/L)
where x is the distance from the nearer support to the section under consideration and L is
..the span.
(b) For other slabs, except where specially provided for, the effective width will depend on the
ratio of the transverse and longitudinal flexural rigidities of the slab. When these are
approximately equal, the value for the effective width as given for solid slabs may be used,
but as the ratio decreases a smaller value shall be taken. The minimum value which need be
taken, however, is the load width plus 4x/L(1 -x/L) meters where x and L are as defined in
(a) above so that, for a section at mid-span, the effective width is equal to 1.0 meter plus the
load width.
(c) Where the concentrated load is near an unsupported edge of a slab the effect,ive width shall
not exceed the value in (a) or (b) above as appropriate, nor half that value plus the distance
of the center of the load from the unsupported edge (see Fig. A-I).
A.3 TWO-WAY SLABS
A.3.t General
I (1) The type of slab dealt with here is one composed of rectangular panels supported at all four edges
by walls or beams stiff enough to be treated as unyielding. This may be assumed to be the case if
the requirements for the ratio between the depth of a beam and its span are in accordance with
Fig. A-2.
(2) These methods are intended for slabs with uniformly distributed loads. If a slab is subjected to
concentrated or line loads, in addition to a uniform load, these can generally be treated by considering
them as equivalent uniform loads using approximate rules, provided that the'sum of the non-uniform
loads on a panel does not exceed 20 percent of the total load.
.
EBCS 2 -1995 107
.
,
.
Load
f=~::+~:~
~ T ~
,
Unsupported Effective Width
Edoe
-L
~Load
Width
X
1,2X (1- L
L
Figure A-I Effective Width of Solid Slab Carrying a Concentrated Load near an Unsupported
Edge
~- L, .\
.!!.L ~ Z. 5 (..!!..!.
) r L, Lx t
"'~} h.
m
IZ'5(""1:-;) ~ /l i hZ ~~r (II II -cz ~ Z,5 ~ ,.
.1+"f ~'1~ to. -L (,.5LI)
.g~ WALL
t~ BEAM
r L, ~
Figure A-2 Support for Two-Way Slabs
A.3.2 Individual Panel Moments
(1) Moments for individual panels with edges either simply supported or fully fixed are calculated as:
ml = al (gd + Qd)Lz2 (A-I)
" Ilere mj is the design moment per unit width at the point of reference
al is the coefficient given in Table A-I as function of aspect ratio L)' /Lz and
support conditions
gd is the uniformly distributed design permanent load
qd is the uniformly distributed design live load
Lz is the shorter span of the panel
L)' is the longer span of the panel .
,
108 EBCS.2 -1995
.i APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS
.Subscripts for moments and moment coefficients (aJ have the following meanings:
$ support
f field (span)
x: direction of shorter span
)' direction of longer span
,
(2) Notations for different critical moments and edge numbers are shown in Fig. A-3. Division of '
slab into middle and edge strips is illustrated in Fig. A-4. .
Mxl
::L
jMY1
~ 4~~
Figure A-3 Notations for Critical Moments
(3) The positive moment coefficients in Table A-1 may be derived from 'the following equations. The
.negative moment coefficients are taken as 4/3 times the positive moment coefficients for the ~ame
direction.
(24 + 2nd + 1.Snd2)
~ a:tf = 1000 (A.2)
rv -fJ
'-4rj -
(/l-~ + Jl--~)2 (A.3)
fJ = ~ {1 -? ~ ({1-~ + Jl--~)} (A.4)
y
where nd is the number of discontinuous edg~ (0 ~ nd ~ 4)
r l' r 2, r 3' r 4 are the ratios of negative moment capacity at edges 1 to 4, respectively,
to the span moment capacity in the same direction and take values of 4/3 for
continuous edges or zero for discontinuous edges.
r LY:o1I r Ly .1 ~
! Middle! 1 M~;d~: '-
~ :
I I Strip I Strip T
! I I
-, I I I f
~ II I L
f I Edge ~ !L.r ~ I- ~ \ Edge I:.!-:
4C Strip T 8 '-Strip 8
Figure .A~-4 Division of Slab into Middle and Edge Strips
.
.EBCS 2 -1995 109
(4) Slabs are considered as divided in each direction into middle strips and edge strips as shown in .
Fig. A-4, the middle strip being three quarters of the width and each edge strip one eighth of the
width.
(5) The maximum design moments calculated as above apply only to the middle strips and no
redistribution shall be made.
(65 Reinforcement in the middle strips shall be detailed in accordance with Section 7.1.7.
(7) Reinforcement in an edge strip, parallel to the edge, need not be less than the minimum given in
Section 7.2.2.2 (minimum areas of tension reinforcement).
A.3.3 Moments in Continuous Slabs
A.3.3.1 General
(1) The first stage of design is to determine support and span moments for all panels individually by
treating their edges as either simply supported or fully fixed (see Section A,.3.2). External edges are
generally considered as simply supported and continuous edges are considered as fully fixed in this
stage.
(2) If the slab is connected with an external wall or if any of its edges is partly fixed and partly
simply supported, the following procedure may be adopted:
(a) The ratio of the actual support moment to the bending moment of fully fixed slab, or the ratio
of the width of fixed part to the width of the simply supported part of the edge is evaluated. .
(b) The bending moments of the slab are then computed by interpolating between different
support conditions. .
(3) For each $UPport over which the slab is continuous there will thus generally be two different
support moments. The difference may be distributed between the panels on either side of the support
to equalize their moments, as in the moment distribution method for frames.
(4) Two methods of differing accuracy, are given here for treating the effects of this redistribution
on moments away from the support.
A.3.3.2 Method I
(1) Method I may be used:
(a) When differences between initial support moments are less than 20 percent of the' larger .
moment, and
(b) only for internal structures where the live load does not exceed 2.5 times the permanent load
(qk ~ 2.5gk) or 0.8 times the dead load for external structures (qk ~ 0.8gk).
In other cases either Method II or other more accurate methods shall be used.
(2) ~I'~n Method I is used, dimensioning is nC!rmallycarried out either using:
(a) Initial moments directly, or
(b) based on the average initial moment at the support.
.
110 EBCS 2 -1995 'w
APPENDIX A: ANAL YSiS OF~ .!.!
Table A-I Bending Moment Coemclents fqr R~gular Panels Supported on Four SI~
with Provision for Torsion at Comers
Lon'lpan
Value3 of L/Lz coeffic~ta,
Support Condition Caeft'. ..~ and ~
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 for aU
valuet of
LILa
r~~~1 ~ 0.032 0.037 0.042 0.046 0.063 0.032
~'m~77/77~ ~ 0.024 0.028 0.032 0.035 0.048 0.024
t~~1 ~ 0.039 9.044 0.048 0.052 0.055 0.058 0.063 0.067 0.039
~77~7~ ~ 0.029 0.033 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.043 0.047 0.050 0.029
~/// //"/"/~ ~ 0.039 0.049 0.056 0.062 0.068 0.073 0.082 0.089 0.039
1--~__J ~ 0.030 0.036 0.042 0.047 0.051 0.055 0.062 0.067 0.030
I/////////~ ~ 0.047 0.056 0.063 0.069 0.074 0.078 0.087 0.093 0.047
L~ ~ 0.036 0.042 0.047 0.051 0.055 0.059 0.065 0.070 0.036
0 ~ 0.046 0.050 0.054 0.057 0.060 0.062 0.067 0.070 -
S ~: 0.034 0.038 0.040 0.043 0.045' 0.047 0.050 0.053 0.034
0 :: 0.~34 0.~46 0.~56 0.~5 0.~72 0.~78 0.~1 O.~OO ~:::
I//~//""""""'I~ ~ 0.057 0.065 0.071 0.076 0.081 0.084 0.092 0.098 -
L_~J ~: 0.043 0.048 0.053 0.057 0.060 0.063 0.069 0.074 0.044
~ ~ 0.058
8 ~~ 0.044 0.054 0.063 0.071 0.078 0.084 0.096 0.105 0.044
"" .
I ~ I ~ 0.056 0.065 0.074 0.081 0.087 0.092 0.103 0.111 0.056
I 9 I ""
,
A.3.3.3 Method 11
.
(1) In this method consideration of the effects of changes of support moments is limited to the adjacent
spans. Since no effects on neighboring support sections need be c.onsidered, only a simple balancing
operation is required at each edge and no iterative process is involved.
,
(2) The procedure for applying Method II, is as follows:
(a) Support and span moments are first calculated for individual panels by assuming each panel to be
fully loaded. This is done by using the coefficients given in Table A-I as described in Section
A.3.2.
(b) The unbalanced moment is distributed using the moment distribution method. The relative stiffness
of each panel shall be taken proportional to its gross moment of inertia divided by the smaller span.
(c) If the support moment is decreased, the span moments n1:v and ~ are then increased to allow for
the changes of support moments. This increase is calculated as being equal to the change of the
3upport moment multiplied by the factors given in Table A-2. If a support moment is increased, no
adjustment shall be made to the span moments.
A.3.4 Elastic Values of Support Moments
(1) The above methods give average values of support moments. In cases where maximum elastic moments '
should be considered (e.g. in watertight structures), elastic theory must be used.
,
A.3.S wads on Supporting Beams
(1) The design loads on beams supporting solid slabs spanning in two directions at right angles supporting
uniformly distributed loads may be assessed from the following equations:
Vx = .Bvx(gd + qJLx (A.5)
Vy = .Bvy(gd + qJLx (A.6)
(2) Table A-3 gives values of load transfer coefficients. The assumed distribution of the load on a
supporting beam is shown in Fig. A-5.
(3) The design load on a beam determined in accordance with (1) and (2) above, may be taken as the
maximum shear in the slab at the center of support.II
'I
112 EBCS 2 -7995 ~
"
APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS
Table A-2 Factors for Adjusting Span Moments m~ and mJ!
~--ILa ~Lx
L,I Lx 1"~._~.'Iy'.~ t ,
Cx C, Cx c,
1.0 0.380 0.280 0.280 0.380
1.1 0.356 0.220 0.314 0.374
1.2 0.338 0.172 0.344 0.364
1.3 0.325 0.135 0.373 0.350
1.4 0.315 0.110 0.398 0.331
1.5 0.305 0.094 0.421 0.310
1.6 0.295 0.083 0.443 0.289
1.7 0.285 0.074 0.461 0.272
1.8 0.274 0.066 0.473 0.258
1.9 0.258 0.060 0.481 0.251
2.0 0.238 0.055 0.484 0.248
/
EBCS 2 -1995
I
,
I
, .
~ ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
';;I~ ~- -~- 'c"
;;~'c
ft" Table A-3 Shear Force Coefficients for Uniformly Loaded Rectangular Panels Supported on Four Sides with Provision for
Torsion at Corners
Edge .B1a for values of L/Lz
Type of panel .Bvy
and location 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0
0 'Continuous 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.33
0 Continuous 0.36 0.39 0.42 0.44 0.45 0.47 0.50 0.52 0.36
Discontinous 0 24
2 .
~"~~ Continuous 0.36 0.40 0.44 0.47 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.59 0.36
~--=-J Discontinous 0.24 0.27 0.29 0.31 0.32 0.34 0.36 0.38 -
F~~~ Continuous 0.40 0.44 0.47 0.50 0.52 0.54 0.57 0.60 0.40
L__~_J Discontinous 0.26 0.29 0.31 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.38 0.40 0.26
r~~1 ~ontin~ous 0.40 0.43 0.45 0.47 0.48 0.49 0.52 0.54 -
~,?:~??~ Discontmous 0.26
Q Continuous 0.40
6 "
Discontmous 0.26 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.44 0.47 -
D Continuous 0.45 0.48 0.5 I 0.53 0.55 0.57 0.60 0.63 -
Discontinous 0.30 0.32 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.39 0.41 0.30
Q Continuou!l 0.45
Discontinous 0.30 0.33 0.36 0.38 0.40 0.42 0.45 0.48 0.30
Q Di~l.'onti/1ou!l 0.33 0.36 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45 0.48 0.50 0.33
V.
A ~+~Wt+1-~ A
~ L ~
f1~ure A.5 Distrihution or Load on a Beam Suppclrting a Two-Way Spanning Sluh
~-~.. .GG~ (il;; -
.APPENDIX A: ANAL YSiS OF SLABS
A.4 FLAT SLABS
.,
t
tc A.4.1 Scope i
(1) The provision 'given in this chapter are for the design of flat slabs supported by a generally rectangular ;
arrangement of columns and where the ratio of the longer to the shorter spans does not exceed 2. i \
r f
11
!
A.4.2 Definitions ~
#
(1) Column strip is a design strip with a width on each side of a column center-line equal to O.25Lx or if
drops with dimension not less than L,.tI3 are usoo.. a width equal to the drop dimension.
(2) Middle strip is a design strip boundeAi by two column .strips.
(3) The division of panels in flat slabs into column Ind middle strip is illustrated in Fig. A-6.
A.4.3 Analysis or Flat Slab Structur~
1
,
A.4.3.1 General f
;
I
V
:
.(1) A flat slab including supporting columns or walls may be analyzed using the equivalent frame method 1.
(Se..."'tion A.4.3.2) or. where applicable. the simplifioo method (Section ~.4.3.3). !
.;
\
I
(2) For both methods of analysis. the negative moments gr~ than those at a distance h)2 from the I
center-line of the column may be ignoroo providoo the moment Mo obtained as the sum of the maximum !
positive design moment and the average of the negative design moments in anyone span of the slab for the I
whole panel width is such that: ;
!
I
,
Mo ~ (gtl + qtl)I.z(Li -~;. (A.1) \
8 3 I
;
i
where Li is the panel length parallel to span, measured from centers of columns \
Lz is the panel width. measuroo from centers of columns ;!
hc is the effective diameter of a column or column head (see (3) below).II
t Wh.en the above condition is not satisfioo, the negative design moments shall be increas.ed.
.
(3) The effective diametc;c of a column or column head hc is the diameter of a circle whose area equals the l
.I
cross-sectional area of the column or. if column heads are used, the area of the column heOO basoo on the 1
,
effective dimensions as defined.in (4) below. In no case shall hc be taken as greater than one-quarter of the
I!
shortest span framing into the column.
,.
,
(4) The effective dimensions of a column head for use in calculation of hc (see (3) above) are limit~ t
.according to the depth of the head. In any direction, the effective dimension of a head L~ shall betaken as
.~E;-- EBCS 2 -7995 115 1':~
c:j
,
.
---
I I
Middle
-"t-- I Lx I
\ I ~ I
I
I I
P
'-
Ly
Ignore Drop If
~ .Dr~p ~ Dim~n~on<LX/S
,-
I
Middle S
.
Ly
Ignore Drop If
Dimensjon i. I... than Lx/S
Figure A-6 Division or Paneb in Flat Slabs.,
the lesser of the actual dimension Lho' or Lh.-, where LI..- is given by:
4
Lh.- = Lc + 2dh (A.8)
I
For a flared head, the actual dimension Lho is that measured to tt~ center of the reinforcing steel (see.Fig.
A-7).
I .
(5) For the purposes this section a drop may only be considered to influence the distribution of moments
within the slab where the smaller dimension of the dr.op is at least one third of the smaller dimension of the
surrounding panels. Smaller drops may, however, still be taken into account when assessing the resistance -
to punching shear.
.
.
116 EBCS 2 -7995
APPENDIX A: ANAL Ys/S OF SLABS
.-
~ Lit. mG. ~ ~ Lit. mG. ~
.,/ ,," ,
, L~ o /, Lho / \
, ./ d.. ~
\
..
(I) Lh = Lh.mox (II) 4.= Ltlo ':
,
"
~.I
it!
:'
,.
,
;
(III) Ltl8 Ltl mo.
.(Iv) LtI- Ltlo
(C)
Figure A-7 Types of Column Head
A.4.3.2 Equivalent Frame Method
(1) The structure may be divided longitudinally and transversely into frames consisting of columns and
strips of slab.
(2) The width of slab used to define the effective stiffness of the slab will depend upon the aspect ratio of
the panels and the type of loading, but the following provisions may be applied in the absence of more
accurate methods:
(a) In the case of vertical loading, the full width of the panel, and
(b) for lateral loading, half the width of the panel, may be used to calculate the stiffness of the slab.
(3) The moment of inertia of any section of slab or column used in calculating the relative stiffness of
members may be assumed to be that of the cross section of the concrete alone.
(4) Moments and forces within a system of flat slab panels may be obtained from analysis of the structure
under the single load case of maximum design load on all spans or panels simultaneously, provided:
(a) The ratio of the characteristic imposed load to the characteristic dead load does not exceed 1.25.
(b) The characteristic imposed load does not exceed 5.0 kN!m2 excluding partitions.
(5) Where it is not appropriate to analyze for the single load case of maximum design load on all spans, it
will be sufficient to consider following the arrangements of vertical loads:
(a) All spans loaded with the maximum design ultimate load, and
,
EBCS 2- 1995 _..,!1;,.,""
,,_..:..,"'~-
!!!
(b) Alternate spans with the maximum design ultimate load and all other spans loaded with the
m~imum design ult~ate load (1.0GJ.
(6) Each frame may be ~alyzed in its entirety by any elastic method. Alternatively, for vertical loads only,
each strip of floor and roof may be analyzed as a separate frame with the columns above and below fixed in
position and direction at their e:x:tremities. In either case, the analysis shall be ~ied out for the 'appropriate
design ultimate loads on each span calculated for a strip of slab of width equal to the distance between
center lines of the panels on each side of the columns.
A.4.3.3 Simplified Method
(1) Moments and shear forces in non-sway flat slab structures may be determined using Table A-4, subject
to the conditions in (2) below.
(2) The following limitations shall be observed when using the simplified method:
(a) Design is based on the single load case of all spans loaded with the maximum design ultimate load.
(b) There..al'e at least three rows of panels of approximately equal span in the direction being consid-
ered.
(c) Successive span length in each direction shall not differ by more than one-third of the longer span.
(d) Maximum offsets of columns from either axis between center lines of successive columns shall not
ex~ 10% of the span (in the direction of the offset).
Table A-4 Bending Moment and Shear Force Coe.fficlents for Flat Slabs or Three or More Equal
Spans
Outer support Near First Center of Interior sup-
center interior interior port
Column Wall of first support span
span
Moment -().O4OFL -().O20FL O.083fl. -O.063fl. O.O71FL -O.OSSl'I.
Shear O.4SF O.40F -O.OOF -O.50F
Total column
moments O.O4OFL --O.O22FL -O.O22l'I.
NOTE 1. F is the total design ultimate load on the strip of slab between adjacent columns considered.
2. L is the effective span = L. -2JJj3.
3. The limitations of Section A.4.3.1(2) need not be cboc:...ed.
4. The OX)~ts shall not be redistributed.
A.4.3.4 lA'vUion of Moments Between Column and Middle Strips
118 EBCS 2 -1995
(I) The design moments obtained from analysi$ of the continuous frames using the Equivalent Frame
Method (see Section A.4.3.2) or from Table A-4 shall be divided between the column and middl,e strips in
the proportions given in Table A-5.
Table A-S Distribution-or ~ign Moments in Pane~ or Flat Slabs
Apportionment bet;ween column and middle strip expressed as
percentages of the total negative or positive design moment
Column strip (%) Middle. strip (%)
Negative 75 25 .
, "
..
55 45 !c.
Positive t~~
::i
NOTE: For. the case where the width of the colurnn~strip is taken as eq\lal to that of the drop, and the middle !:~;
strip is thereby increased in width, the design moments to be resisted by the middle strip shall be '~$
~ increased in proportion to its increased width. The design moments to be resisted by the column "
strip may be decreased by an amount such that the total positive and the total negative design
moments resisted by th~ column strip and middle strip together are unchanged.
A.4.4 Design Considerations
A.4.4.1 General
(1) Details of reinforcement in flat slabs shall be as follows:
(a) The reinforcement in flat slabs shall have minimum bend point locations and extensions for
reinforcement as prescribed in Fig. A-8.
(b) Where adjacent spans are unequal, extension of negative reinforcement beyond the face of support
as prescribed in Fig. A-8 shall be based on requirements of longer span.
(c) Bent bars may be used only when depth-to-span ratio permits use of bends 450 or less.
(2) For flat slabs in frames not braced against sidesway and for flat slabs resisting lateral loads, lengths of
reinforcement shall be determined by analysis but shall not be less than those prescribed in Fig. A-8.
A.4.4.2 Internal Panels
(1) The column and middle strips shall be designed to withstand the design moments obtained from Section
A.4.3.
(2) Two-thirds of the amount of reinforcement required to resist the negative design moment in the column
strip shall be placed in a width equal to half that of the column strip and central with the column. This
concentration of reinforcement over the column will increase the capacity of the slab for transfer of moment
.to the column by flexure (see Section A.4.4.4)
.
EBCS 2 -1995 1
I.ETHIOPIAN
BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
jI
.
c.. ~ CJ) ~ MINIMUM
f ir: ~ ~ ~ PERCENT- WITHOUT DROP PANELS WITH DROP PANELS,
~ ~ CD 9 AT SECTION
* '
~" d--l d e--l e
c.. 50
'CJ) ~ .f.-- b b-.j I.-- b
~ Remainder I' ,I .
.-
:I: ,
!:2 75 Max-.-l
~ ~ 50 -I
~ ~ I Max. 0.1251
c.. ~
iE g Remainder
~ 150
z
2
~" 3 I d--l
8 c.. 50
* ~ b-i
~ Remainder
~
z
UJ
CD 2 50
a
~
~
~ Remainder
0
~ ~ 100 c-i
<t ~
CD .
~
:I:
~ ~ 50
a: ~
~ ~
CJ) a
Rd ~ CD emaln er 0 Max 0 15f Max 0151
~ Ibars).j ~c
UJ 50
-J c..
~ * ~ .
2 CJ) I"
~ Remainder .
CD
~
Z
~ ~ 50 I
t::
a
CD Remainder
150 75 Max. 75Max 150
NOTE:
;=f ~ c Clear spa n -.t n c Clear span -I n c
All measurements
~ :~~:~j-_.t=: =:Ij , Face of support Face of support
In mm
Center to center span -l Center to center span-1
Exterior support t Interior support Exterior support t
(No slob continuity) (Continuity provided) (No slob continuity) .
* e'en! bars at exterior supports BAR LENGTH FROM FACE OF SUPPORT
may be used If a oeneral MINIMUM LENGTH MAXIMUM LENGTH
analysIs IS modi MARK a b c d I f Q -
LENGTH 0141 n 0201n 0221n 030/n 033ln 020/n 024Jn
.
Figure A-8 Minimum Bend Point Locations and Extensiom for Reinforcanent in Flat Sla~
120 EBCS 2 .7995
, APPENDIX A: ANAL YSIS OF SLABS
-
A..4.4.3 Edgt Panels
*
(1) The design moments shall be apportioned and designed exactly as for an internal panel, using the same
column and middle strips as for an internal panel.
A.4.4.4 Moment Transfer between Slab and Column
(1) When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lateral forces cause transfer of moment between slab and
column, a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be transferred by flexure. Fraction of unbalanced
moment not transferred by flexure shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in accordance with Section
4.7.4.
(2) A fraction of the unbalanced moment given by
1
11 ~
1 + fj;/i; (A.9)
YOt'OZ
shall 'be considered , transferred by flexure over an effective slab width between lines that are one and one
half slab or drop panel thickness (1.5h) outside opposite faces of the column or capital.
(3) Concentration of reinforcement over the column by closer spacing as specified in Section A.4.2(2), or
additional reinforcement must be used to resist the unbalanced moment on the effective slab width defined
in (2) above.
'i
.(4) The design for transfer of load from slab to supporting columns or walls through shear and torsion shall
be in accordance with Chapter 4.
(5) As an alternative to (2) above, the slab may be designed for the minimum bending moments per unit
width, m~ and m&iy in the x and y direction, respectively, given by Eq. A.10 (see Fig. A-9).
m~ (or m&iy) ~ nVSd (A. 10) ;'
il
I'
where V Sd is the shear force developed along the critical section ~
;
n is the moment coefficient given in Table A-6. !
i
(6) In checking the corresponding resisting moments, only those reinforcing bars shall be taken into 'j
account, which are appropriately anchored beyond the critical area (Fig. A-10) ,\
(7) Where analysis of the structure indicates a design column moment larger than the moment M, which can be transferred by flexure and shear combined (in accordance with (2) and (4) above), the design
edge moment in the slab shall be reduced to a value not greater than M,."", and the positive design moments
~ in the span adjusted accordingly. The normal limitations on redistributions and neutral axis depth may be
disregarded in this case.
(8) Moments in excess of M,."", may only be transferred to a column if an edge beam or strip of slab along
the free edge is reinforced to carry the extra moment into the column by torsion.
EBCS 2 -1995
.
-~~~ .
~
r- O.IL;r. ~ ~ m.dy I ~.. ~)
/i /1
, Lr ~L ~ Iy
I _O"'~;~~~~~~~_I
I
~ La '1
~y
Hgure A-9 Bending Moments mSdx and mSdy in Slab-Column Joints subjectea tu E-ecentric Loading, anc
Effective Width for resisting these Moments
(9) In the absence of an edge beam, an appropriate breadth of slab may be assessed by using the principles
illustrated in Fig. A-II, for transfer of moments between the slab and an edge or corner column.
Table A-6 Moment Coefficient n for Equation (A. to)
n for m.w n for msdy
Position of Effective Effective.
column top bottom width top bottom width
Internal column -0.125 0 0.3L, -0.125 0 0.3Lx.
Edge columns
edge of slab
parallel, to x-axis -0.25 0 0.15L, -0.125 0.125 (per m)
"10
Edge columns
edge of slab
parallel to y-axis -0.125 0.125 (per m) -0.25 0 0.15.Lx
Corner column -0.5 0.5 L (per m) -0.5 L 0.5 (per m)
.4.4.4.5 Panel with Marginal Beams or Walls,
(1) Where the slab is supported by a marginal beam with a depth greater than 1.5 times the thickness of the
slab, or by a wall then:
(a) the total design load to be carried by !he beam or wall shall comprise those loads directly on the
~
wall or beam plus a uniformly distributed load equal to one-quarter of the total design load on the -
panel; and
(b) the design moments of the half-column strip adjacent to the beam or wall shall be one-quarter of the-
design moments obtainoo from Section A.4.3.
122 EBCS 2 -7995
Wjl ~
Edge Column Corner
..:~
rr::::;;:::~ .
Section A-A
Figure .~-IO Detailing Reinforcement over Edge and Corn~ Columns
fo!Y
-;--;_.~-
---YI~lllll-~~[---'\"
I b. I
~ ~..~
I .Cx+ Y I
I .
~ ,
-r--.JF~ ."
! 8jf;' .
I I
I b. I
..~
I I
18CX+Cy I
I
fo!Y ~
} 1
Figure A-II Definition of Breadth or Effective Moment Transfer Strip b, for Typical Cases
.~:-
,~BCS2:-1995 123~~
-~.~~l. -
.
A.4.4.6 Negative Moments at Free Edge .
(1) Reinforcement for negative design moments (other than in the column strip) is only needed where
moments arise from loading on any extension of the slab beyond the column center-lines. However, top
reinforcement at least equal to the minimum reinforcement defined in Section 7.2.2.2 shall be provided,
ext~nding at least O.1L or an anchorage length, whichever is the greater, into the span.
A.4.5 Opening in Panels
A.4.S.1 General
(1) Except for openings complying with Sections A.4.5.2, A.4.5.3 and A.4.5.4, openings ~Qall be complete-
ly framed on all sides with beams to carry the loads to the columns.
(2) No opening shall encroach upon a column head.
A.4.S.2 Holes in Areas Bounded by Column StripsI
(1) Holes in areas bounded by cOlumn strips may be formed provided:I
~I
(a) their greatest dimension in a direction parallel to a center-line of the panel does not exceed O.4L;,
and
j (b) the total positive and negative design moments are redistributed between.the remaining structure to.1
-meet the changed conditions.
~ -
A.4.S.3 Holes in Areas Common to Two Column Strips
(1) Holes in areas common to two column strips may be formed provided:
(a) in aggregate their length or width does not exceed one-tenth of the width of the column strip;
(b) the reduced sections are capable of resisting the appropriate moments; and
(c) the perimeter for calculating the design shear stress is reduced if appropriate.
A.4.S.4 Holes in Areas Common to a Column Strip and a Middle Strip
(1) Holes in areas common to a column strip a middle may be formed provided:
(a) in aggregate their length or width does not exceed one quarter of the width of the column strip; and'
(b) the reduced sections are capable of resisting the appropriate design moments.
.
124 EBCS 2 -1995 .
APPENDIX g-
.PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
B.1 SCOPE
(1) Provisions in this chapter apply to structural members prestress~ with high strength steel meeting
the requirements for prestressing steels in Section B.2.2.
(2) All provisions of this Code'not specifically excluded, and not in conflict with the provisions of
this chapter, are to be considered applicabi~ to prestressed concrete. .t i
(3) The following provisions shall not apply to prestressed concrete unless specifically noted: ..;,
Sections 3.7.8,3.7.9,6.2,7.2.1,7.2.2,7.2.4,7.2.5, and Appendix A. ';
B.2 DATA ON PRFSI'RE5SED STEEL AND PRFSI'RESSING DEVIC~
B.2.1 Prestr~ing Steel
.B.2.1.1 General
(1) This section applies to wires, bars and strands used as prestressing tendons in concrete structures.
(2) The require~ents apply to the product in the condition in whtch it is delivered.
(3) The methods of production, the specified characteristics, the methods of testing and the methods
of attestation of conformity shall be in accordance with relevant Standards for prestressing materials.
(4) Each prOduct shall be clearly identifiable with respect to the classification system in Section
B.2.1.2.
(5) Tensile strength (I,), 0.1 % proof str~ (/P>.J and elongation at maximum load (e..) shall be
appropriately specified in relevant Standards, and established by standard tests.
(6) For steels complying with this Code, tensile strength, 0.1 % proof s.tress, and elongation at
maximum load are specified in terms of characteristic values; these values are designated respectively
Ipt, IP>.lk and e...
B.2..1.2 Classification and Geometry
(1) The products (wires, strands and bars) shall be classified according to:
(a) Grade, denoting the value of the 0.1 % proof stress ifP>.IJ and the value of the tensile strength
<f.-) in MFa.
(b) Class, indicating the relaxation behavior
(c) Size
, (d) Surface characteristics.-"111111111111.
L.~~::- "'~:~..~; 125
-
ETHIOPLAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.
(2) Each coMignment shall be accompanied by a certificate containing all the infonnation necessat.y .
for its identification with regard to (a) -(d) in (1) above and additional information where necessary.
, (3) The actual crosa sectional area of the products shall not differ from theil: normal cross sectional
area by more than the limits specified in the relevant Standards;
j , (4) There shall be no welds in wires and bars. Individual wires of strands may contain staggered't4
welds made only before cold drawing.
wi
l' .
, (5) For coiled products, after uncoiling a length of wire or strand lying free on a flat surface, .the
maximum bow heiaht. from a base line of specified length shall be less than the values specified in
the relevant Standards.
(6) In this Code, three cl~ of relaxation are defined (see Section B.2.1.5.2)
(a) Class 1 : for wires and strands, high relaxation
.(b) Class 2 : for wires and strands, low relaxation
(c) Class 3 : for bars.
: (7) Where required, surface characteristics of prestressing steel shall comply with relevant Standards.
B.2..t.3 PhyliCGl Properties
(1) The following mean values may be assumed : ~
(a) Density : 7850 kg/m'
(b) Coefficient of thermal expansion : 10 x l0-6/OC. -
B..1.1.4 Mechanical Properties
B.2..1.4.1 Strength
.
.
(1) The 0.1 % proof stress (f,.oU> arid the specifioo value of the tensile strength (f,.J are defined as tile
.characteristic value of the 0.1 ~ proof load and th~ characteristic maximum load in axial tension
respectively, divided by the oominal cross sectional area.
(2) Th~ r:atio of the actual maximum load to the specified maximum load shall not exceed the values
speci.fi~ relevant StaOOards.
B.2.1.4.2. Stress-Strain DlagrQln
(1) Stress~strain diagrams for the products, based on production data, shall be prepared and made
available by the producer as ail annex to the certificate accompanying the consignment.
; .
B.2..i.4..3 Ductility OIaracteristics ~
(1) 1:he products shall have adequate ductility in elongation, as specified in relevant Standards.
'\ (2) The products shall be assumed to have adequate ductility in bending if the characteristic elongation
of the prestressing steel at maximum load E.. is at least 3.5~. ---,,-
.
126 EBCS 2- .1995 ~
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
(3) Adequate ductility in bending may be assumed if the products satisfy the requirements for
bendability of the relevant Standards.
8.2.1.4.4 Modulus of Elasticity
(1) A mean value of 200 GPa may be assumed for wires and bars. The actual value can range from
195 to 205 GPa, depending on the manufacturing process.
(2) A value of 190 GPa may be assumed for strand. The actual value can range from 175 to 195 GPa,
depending on the manufacturing process. Certificates accompanying the consignment should give the
appropriate value.
8.2.1.4.5 Fatigue
(1) The products shall have adequate fat,igue strength.
...,,'1
,,~~'"
(2) For fatigue requirements of prestressing steel refer to relevant Standards. o',..,~
,
B.2.1.4.6 Multi-Axial Stresses
(1) The behavior of the products under multi-axial stresses shall be adequate.
(2) Adequa,te behavior under multi-axial stresses may be assumed if the products satisfy the
,..
requirementS specified in the relevant Standards.
B.2.1.5 Technological Properties
B.2.1.5.1 Surface Condition
(1) The products shall be free from defects which could impair their performance as prestressing
tendons.
(2) Longitudinal cracks need not be considered as defects if their depth is less than the values
specified in relevant Standards.
B.2.1.5.2 Relaxation
(1) The products shall be classified for relaxation purposes, according to the maximum percentages
of loss of stress.
B.2.1.5.3 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion
(1) The products shall have an acceptably low level of susceptibility to stress corrosion.
(2) The level of susceptibility to stress corrosion may be assumed to be acceptably low if the products
comply with the criteria specified in relevant Standards.
EBCS 2 -1995 127
.
B.2.2 Prestressing Devi~ .
B.2.2.1 Anchorages and Couplers
B.2.2.1.1 General
'(I) This section applies to anchoriIfg devices (anchorages) and coupling device;" (couplers) for
application in post-tensioned construction, where:
, (a) Anchorages are used to transmit the forces in tendons to the concrete in the anchorage zone;
(b) Couplers are used to connect individual lengths of tendon to make continuous tendons.
" .G) The performance requirements, the methods of testing and the methods of attestation of confonnity
"shall be defined in relevant, Standards. "
(3) In establishing performance requirements, consideration shall be given to :
(a) The relative efficiency of the tendon anchorage/coupler assembly in comparing the actual
value of the failure load of the assembly with that of the tendon.
(b) The elongation of the anchored/coupled tendon at failure.
(c) The fatigue strength of the anchored/coupled tendon.
(d) The load which can be transferred by the anchorage to the concrete, taking account of the
f location of the anchorage in the cross-section, the spacing between anchorages, the concrete
~ strength and the reinforcement in the anchorage zone. ~
~
.(4) Requirements for the use of anchorages and couplers, shall be defined in technical approval .
I documents. Detailing of anchorage zones shall comply with Sections B.5 and B.6.
I (5) When defining test methods, consideration shall be given to-two modes of testing'
(a) Mode a : when components of known geometry and material specification have been taken
I at random out of production or form stock.I
(b) Mode b : when components have been selected by the producer of the components or when
I prototype anchorages or couplers are to be tested.
I
I B.2.2.1.2 Mechanical Properties
(1) Tendon-anchorage assemblies and tendon-coupler assemblies shall have strength, elongation and
fatigue characteristics sufficient to meet the basic requirements of Chapter 3.
(2) This may be assumed if :
(a) The geometry and material characteristics of the anchorage and coupler components are such
that their premature failure is precluded.
(b) The elongation at failure of the assemblies is not excessive. -
(c) Tendon-anchorage assemblies are not located in otherwise highly-stressed zones.
For the fatigue requirements of anchorages and couplers, refer to relevant Standards. -
(3) The strength of the anchorage devices and zones shall be adequate for the transfer of the tendon
force to the concrete and the formation of cracks in the anchorage zone does not impair the function .
of the anchorage.
128 EBCS 2 -1995
-" ==
APPENDIX S: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
-~ (4) Thil may be usumed if :
(a) The strength of the anchorage devices exceeds the characteristic breaking load of the tendon,
either under static loading conditions or a limited number of load cycles.
(b) The detailing provisions of this Code are met.
8.2 .2 .2 DIIds aM ShtGths
8.2.2.2.1 ~Mral
(1) This section applied to post-tensioned concrete construction where the tendons are tensioned in l
internal ducts.
(2) For bonded tendons, where the ducts are grouted after tensioning, the shape (profile) of the duct
shall permit the proper transfer of forces from the tendons to the concrete. I
i
;
(3) The performance requirements, the methods of testing and the methods of attestation of conformity
shall be defined in relevant Standards.
(4) Requirements covering the use of ducts and sheaths shall be defined in technical approval
documents .
(5) Sheaths should consist of adequate materials as specified in relevant Standards.
8.3 8AS1S OF D~IGN
(1) All provisions in Chapter 3 shall apply to prestressed concrete.
B.3.1 Partial Safety Factors for Materials
(1) Partial safety factors for material properties are given in Section 3.5.3.
B.3.2 Partial Safety Factors for Action on Building Structures
(1) Partial safety factors for different effects of action are given in Table B.l in addition to the
requirements specified in Table 3.3.
Table B.1: Partial Factors for Action in Building Structures
Types of Effect Prestressing, 'Y p
Favorable effect 0.9 or 1.0
Unfavorable effect 1.2 or 1.0
(2) For the evaluation of local effects (anchorage zones, bursting pressure) an effort equivalent to the
ultimate characteristic strength shall be applied to the tendons (see Section B.4.3).
(3) For the verification of the design of prestressed elements, the 'Yp values in Table B.I should
generally be used. However, for the evaluation of the combined effects of prestressing and of self-
weight, reduced values of partial safety factors, which do not include allowances for analytical
.uncertainty, may be used (e.g. 'Yp = 1.0 and 'Yo = 1.2).-1111111111111
ESCS 2 -1995 129
\
-
:8.4 ANALYSIS
(1) All provisions in Chapter 4 shall apply to prestressed concrete members.
B.4.1 Pr~~ed Slabs
(1) The rules given in (2)-(4) below complement those given in Section B.4.3.
,
(2) Regardless of the type of tendons used (e.g. bonded or unhanded), the contact forces due to the
curvature and friction of the tendons and the forces acting on the anchorage devices may be treated
as external loads in the serviceability limit states.
(3) For the ductility classification of prestressed tendons see Section B.2.1.4.3(3).
(4) Plastic analysis should not be applied to members where pretensioned tendons are used, unless
j'ustified.
B.4.2. Anchorage Zon~ ror Post-Tensioning Forces
(1) Such zones, which are subjected to concentrated for~, shall be analyzed and designed to take
account of:
(a) the overall equilibrium of the zone;
(b) the transverse tensile effects due to the anchorages, individually and as a whole;
(c) compression struts, which develop in the anchor~e zone of post-tensioned members, and
local bearing stresses under the anchorages.
(2) Such zones in post-tensioned members may be designed using the methods given in Section
B.4.2.3 or by using adequate strut and tie models based on Section 3.8.1.3.
(3) Three-dimensional models should be considered, where the dimensions of the bearing area are
small compared with the cross-section of the anchorage zone.
(4) The detailing requirements of Chapter 7 generally, and Section B.#; 5 and B.6.7.1 in particular,
shall be met.
B.4.3 Determination or the Effects or Pr~~ing
B.4.3.1 General
, (1) This section relates to structures where prestress is provided by fully bonded internal tendons.
(2) The effects to be considered are:
,
(a) Local effects around anchorages and where tendons change uection.
(b) Direct effects in determinate structures. .
(c) Direct and secoooary indirect effects due to reduooant restraints in indeterminate structures.
(3) For members containing permanently unbonded tendons refer to relevant Standards. -
(4) Members containing tendons which are temporarily unbonded during construction may be treated
using simplified assumptions. In general, they may be treated as members with bonded tendons, .
130 EBCS 1 -1995
r """",)"
APPENDIX 8: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE !
i
0-
except that at the ultimate limit state. The stress in tendons is assumed not to have increased due to
loading. ':I. ".,
.!
..
8.4.3.1. DtttrMinQtjo. of Prestressing Force i
.
(1) The mean value of the prestressing force is given by (a) or (b) below. whichever is appropriate: t
\
(a) For pre-terisioned members! "
I
I
i
p.., = Po -fjp. -fjp,(t) -fjp,.(x) (B. 1) ,I
fjp .(x) may require consideration where deflected tendons are use.
(b) For post-tensioned members ~
p.., = Po -fjp c -fjp ,.(x) -fjp..l -fjp,(t) (B.2)
where p.., is the mean value of the prestressing at time t and at a particular point along
the member
Po is the initial force at the a;tive end of the tendon immediately after stressing.
fjp ,.(x) is the loss due to friction
fjp ..1 is the loss due to anchr I.'age slip ,
fjp c is the loss due to elastic deformation of the member at transfer : '
fjp,(t) is the loss due to creep. shrinkage and relaxation at time t.
(2) For limits on the initial prestress and methods of calculating losses, see Section B.5. For
.transmission lengths and the dispersion of prestress. see Section B.5.5.
.(3) For serviceability calculations. allowance shall be made for possible variations in prestress. Two
characteristic values of the prestressing force at the serviceability limit state are estimated from: f ~.
P 1,.,.., = r P ",' ;
(B.3) i
P1,i-./ =ri-./P...,
where Pt ,., and P1,.,.. are respectively the upper and lower characteristic values.
p.., is the mean prestressing force estimated using the mean 'values for the deformation
properties and the losses calculated in accordance with Section B.5.
r and r.,.. may be taken as 1.1 and 0.9 respectively in absence of a more rigorous
determination and provided that the sum of the losses due to friction and time dependent
effects is ~ 30% of the initial prestress. ,',
i (4) The values of p.., which will generally be used in design are : I. f~I
P ..0 is the initial prestress at time t = 0 II :'
P. is the prestress after occurrence of all losses i ..
-(5) At the ultimate limit state the design value of prestress is given by: I
t
P Ii = Y ~ ".' (B. 4) t
(6) Values for 'Yp are given in Table B.l.
.
EBCS 2 -1995 131 !
-v
f.I
;!
,.
..
, ,
(7) For considering local effects at the ultimate limit state, the prestressing force shall be taken as .
equal to the characteristic strength of the tendons.
(8) This applies when checking the influence of concentrated forces or bursting effects at anchorages
or where tendons change direction Section B.5
B.4.~.3 Effects of Prestressing under Service Conditions
(1) The statically determinate and indeterminate internal forces and moments caused by prestressing
shall be calculated by elastic theory.
(2) For normal buildings where the calculation of crack width is not considered necessary, the mean
values of prestress may be used.
(3) In other cases, where the structural response is highly sensitive to the influence of prestress, the
effects of prestress may be determined according to (a) or (b) below, as appropriate.
(a) For checking cracking or decompression see Section 5.3), the opening of joints between
precast elements and fatigue effects, the relevant estimated characteristic values of the
prestress are used.
(b) ,For checking compressive stresses the mean values of prestress are used.
B.4.3.4 Effects of Prestressing at the Ultimate Limit States
.
B.4.3.4.1 Structural Analysis -Linear Methods
(1) Statically determinate and indeterminate effects of prestress shall be calculated using the
t1.ppropriate ultimate design value of the prestressing force.
(2) In linear structural analysis 'Yp may be taken as 1.0.
(3) Where linear analysis with redistribution is used the moments to which the redistribution is applied
shall be calculated including any statically indeterminate effects of prestress.
B.4.3.4.2 Design of Sections
(1) When assessing the behavior of a section at the ultimate limit state, the prestressing force acting
on the section is taken as the design value, Pd. The prestrain corresponding to this force shall be
taken into account in the assessment of section strength.
(2) The prestrain may be taken into account by shifting the origin of the design stress-strain diagram
for the prestressing tendons by an amount corresponding to the design prestress.
(3) 'Y p may be taken as 1.0 provided the following conditions are l'Oth met: -
(a) Not more than 25% of the total area of prestressed steel is located within the compression
zone at the ultimate limit state, and -
(b) The stress at ultimate in the prestressing steel closest to the tension face exceedsf~Jt/'Y';.
If the conditions are not met, the lower value of 'Yp given in Table B.1 should be applied to all
tendons. .
132 EBt;$ 2 -1995
"
1 "
~ ,,&
1; 7~
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE i ,Ji
.--, : ";1
(4) For the effects of inclined tendons, see Section B.5.5.8. '; ):1
.' ;'1 (5) Any indirect prestres,c.ing moments due to redundant rf..8traints should be taken at uleir :l ' '!
characteristic values. ! 'i~
:
i
,
I
B.4.3.5 Detenninaticn of the Effects of Time Dependent Defonnation of Concrete !
B.4.3.5.1 General
(1) The accuracy of the procedures for the calculation of the effects of creep and shrinkage of
concrete shall be consistent with the reliability of the data available for thE"; description cf tllese
phenomena and the importance of their effects on the limit state considered.
(2) In gelleral, the effel.."ts of creep and shrinkage shall be taken into acc{)unt only for the serviceabiiity
limit states. An important exception concerns second order effects.
(3) Special investigations shall be considered when the concrete is subjected to extremes of
temperature.
(4) The effects of steam curing may be taken into account by means of simplified assumptions.
(5) The following assumptions may be adoptoo to give an acceptable estimate of the behavior of a
concrete section if the stresses are kept within the limits corresponding to the normal serviceI
conditions ;I
.(a) creep and shrinkage are independent
(b) a linear relationship is assumed between creep and the stress causing the creep
-(c) non-uniform temperature and moisture effects are neglected
(d) the principle of superposition is assumed to apply for actions occurring at different ages
(e) the above assumptions also apply to concrete in tension
i
(6) For the evaluation of the time dependent losses of prestress, the effects of creep, shrinkage and
relaxation of the tendons shall be taken into account (see Section B.5.5). ;
1 '
1
(7) The creep function is given by the relationship: \ .
i
J(t, to) = 1/Ee(to) + <p (t,.fo)IEe2I (B.5) \.
:
where to is the time at initial loading o{ the concrete i
t is the time considered
J(t,t.,) is the creep function at time t
Ee(t) is the tangent modulus of elasticity at time to
Ee2I is the tangent modulus of elasticity at 28 days
<P(I.Io) is the creep coefficient related to the elastic deformation at 28 days
-Values are given in C~lapter 2 for final creep coefficients cP for typical situations. It
should be noted, however, that the definitions of Ee(lo) and Ee2S above, differ from that in
Section 2.5 where the secant modulus Ee-. is defined. Hence, where the creep coefficients
-of Table 2.6 are used in connection with Ee(toJ and Ee-., respectively, and where creep
deformations are significant, the values of Table 2.6 should be multiplied by 1.05.
.
EBCS 2 -1995 133
-
ETHIOPIAN BUILD/NO CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
(8) On die basis of the assumptions listed in (5) above, the total strain for concrete subjected to initial .
loidiDa at time t. with a stress 0'0 and subjected to subsequent stress variations ~O'(tJ at time tl may
be exp~ed as follows:
E.(t.t..} = f,.(t) + 0'0 J(t.t) + E J(t.tJ~O'(tJ (B.6)
In this expression E~(t) denotes an imposed deformation independent of the stresses (e.g.
, shrinkage, temperature effects).
(9) ~or the purpose of structural analysis, Eq. B.6 may be written as follows:
E.(t,t.) .E~(t) + O'(t.) J(t,t.) + [O'(t) -O'(t.)] [~ + x~ ] (B.7)
.Ec(t.) Fc28
where the ageing coefficient x depends on the development of strain with time.
(10) In normal cases, x may be taken as 0.8. This simplification is good in the case of pure
j relaxation of the effects of a constant imposed deformation but is also adequate in cases where onlyI
long tenD effects are considered.,
(II) If the stresses in the concrete only vary slightly, the deformations may be calculated using anI
effective modulus of elasticity:I
Ec.,ff = Ec(to)/(1 + ltI(t.to (B.8) .I
For the notation see (7) above.I
j B.5. SECTION AND MEMBER D~IGN -I
B.5.1 ~tresing Steel: General
(1) Data on material properties given in this section are either representative values, correspondingI
to the relevant steel grade specified in appropriate Standards, or are idealizations suitable for design
purposesII
(2) In general, the properties specified are those given in Section B.2.1.1(5) or other appropriateI
Standards.
II
(3) Unless stated otherwise, design shall be based on a specified grade, represented by itsI
characteristic 0.1 % proof stress ifP>.IJ.I
(4) All types of prestressing steel specified in Section B.2.1, which satisfy the mechanical, physical
and technological requirements or other relevant Standards may generally be used in design, in
accordance with the data given below, unless greater accuracy is required.
B.5.2 Physical Properties or Prestressing Steel ~
(1) The values given in Section B.2.1.3 may be used as design data. They may be assumed to be
valid in the range from -2O"C to 200"C. -
4
\ 134 EBCS 2 -1995 -
a APPENDIX 8: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
.B.S.3 Mechanical Properties or Prestressing Steel
B.S.3.1 Strength
(1) For all types of prestressing steel the values for /p}.\k' E- and/pi shall be defined.
(2) Relevant properties for defined types and grades of steel may be taken from relevant Standards.
For other types of steel, the properties are to be confirmed by. technical approval documents.
(3) Design calculations may be based on the nominal size or the nominal cross-sectional area of the
prestressing steel. l
i
B.S.3.2 Modulus of FJasticity
(1) The values givep in Section B.2.1.4.4 apply. {
B.S.3.3 Stress-Strain Diagram
(1) The general ductility requirements shall be in accordance with Section B.2.1.4.3 and as specified
in relevant Standards.
-:
i
(2) An idealized bi-linear diagram is given in Fig. B-1. This diagram is valid for temperatures from 1 "
-200C to 200"C. 11
)!
.I ~! '" c
.r:' :)
a- ~ 1 "i , ,} i ~ '1 ..
.--1:.
--'"
Ok ,'!~
O.g'Ok '-. .I
i ". Ideallsed
0.91' 'Ok
gk -
~ design I ~s
I
/,
e..200kN/mm2 ,
i
t
uk Eo t
t
Figure B-1 IJesign Stress--sfraTll DIagram (or ~estressing S-teel "
i
!
(3) Figure B-1 may generally be used for overall analysis, local verifications and the checking of
-section capacity.
(4) Figure B-1 may be modified, e.g with a flatter or horizontal top branch, for local verificatlol~
or section design. (
I
(5) Design values for the steel stress are derived from the idealized characteristic diagram by' dividing
I .by 'Y., the partial factor for prestressing steel (see Section B.3.2)
f
-E8CS 2 -7995 135 i
i
!
;1
r'
.APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
.B.S.3 Mechanical Properties or Prestressing Steel
B.S.3.1 Strength
(1) For all types of prestressing steel the values for /~.1k' E,. and/pi shall be defined.
(2) Relevant properties for defined types and grades of steel may be taken from relevant Standards.
For other types of steel, the properties are to be confirmed by technical approval documents.
.,
,
(3) Design calculations may be based on the nominal size or the nominal cross-sectional area of the :
prestressing steel. i
i
B.S.3.2 Modulus of Elasticity
(1) The values givep in Section B.2.1.4.4 apply.
B.S.3.3 Stress-Strain Diagram
(1) The general ductility requirements shall be in accordance with Section B.2.1.4.3 and as specified
in relevant Standards.
(2) An idealized bi-linear diagram is given in Fig. B-1. This diagram is valid for temperatures from
-200C to 200"C.
.
0"
.~-
, --,
Dk'"
0'9' ,-'
Dk i idealised
0.9" 'Dk
Dk -
~ design I ~s
I
I "
e. .200kN/mm2 1
i
uk Eo \
1
"
Figure ~ 1 Design Stress--sfraTn DIagram (or 'Prestressing s-teel :
(3) Figure B-1 may generally be used for overall analysis, local verifications and the checking of
section capacity.
(4) Figure B-1 may be modified, e.g with a flatter or horizontal top branch, for local veriticat1ol~
or section design. i
I
(5) Design values for the steel stress are derived from the idealized characteristic diagram by. dividing
I .by 'Y., the partial factor for prestressing steel (see Section B.3.2)
r
-EBCS 2 -1995 135 i
i,
.
(6) For section design, either of the following assumptions may be made: .
(a) a horizontal top branch to the design curve in Fig. B-1, the stress in the prestressing steel is
limited to 0.9 f..I'"(; with no limit to the steel strain, although in some cases it may be
convenient to assume a limit.
(b) an inclined top branch, with the increasing steel strain limited to .0.01.
,
B.5.3.4 Ductility
(l)Tbe provisions of Section B.2.1.4.3 shall apply.
(2) For structural analysis, if not stated otherwise, post-tensioned tendons may be assumed as having
high ductility: pre-tensioned tendons are assumed as having normal ductility.
B.5.3.5 Fatigue
~ (1) For fatigue requirements for prestressing steel, refer to relevant standards.
B.5.3.6 Multi-Axial Stresses
(1) If not stated otherwise in technical approval documents, tendons assembled from prestressing steel
satisfying the requirements of Section B.2.1.4.6 may be considered to withstand the full specified
tensile strength, if the bending radius of the saddle, which is supporting the tendon at its point of
deviation, satisfies the requirements of Table B.2.
(2) The values in Table B.2 do not relate to the coefficients of friction in Section B.5.5.5(8).
Table B.2 Criteria for Satisfying Multi-Axial Conditions in Tendons
Type of tendon
Ratio = minimu~ bending radius
nominal diameter
Single wire or strand, deflected after tensioning 15
Single wire or strand, tensioned in smooth duct 20
Single wire or strand, tensioned in ribbed duct 40
Multi wire or strand tendon Preceding values multiplied by n1/~
to num er 0 wires or stran sine ten on
~ = number of wires or strands transferring the radial force of all wires or strands in the
tendon to the deviator (see Fig. B-2).
B.5.3.7 Anchorage or Coupler Assemblies of Tendons
(1) Tendon anchorage assemblies and tendon coupler assemblies satisfying the performance
requirements of Section B.2.2.1.2 may be considered to withstand the full characteristic
strength of the tendon.
136 EBCS 2 .1995
}
---,
." d ., "
: ~-:.t.
\ ,-
, -;'-r
PRESTRESSI NG
TENDON
(assembled from wires or strands)
~
~, l'igure B-3 Example or n1/~ value in Table B-2 (in this case n1/~ = 7/3
t
i
,"! 8.5.4 Technological Properties or Prestressing Steel
8.5.4.1 Relaxation
(1) Certificates accompanying the consignments shall indicate the class and relevant relaxation data
.of the prestressing steel (see Section B.2.1.5 and relevant standards).
(2) For design calculations, the values which may be taken into account for losses at 1000 h are either
-those given in the certificate or those assumed in Fig. B-3 for the three classes of steel shown. The
long term values of the relaxation losses may be assumed to be three times the relaxation losses after
1000 h.
(3) An indication of how relaxation losses increase between 0-1000 hours is given in Table B.3.
Table B.3 Indication or Relationship Between Relaxation Losses and Time up to 1000 hours
Time in hours I 5 20 100 200 500 1000
Relaxation losses as per-
centages of losses after
1000 hours 15 25 35 55 65 85 100
(4) Relaxation at temperatures of the structure over 20"C will be higher than given in Fig. B-4. This
may affect building structures in hot climates, power plants, etc. If necessary the producer should
be asked to include relevant information in the certificate Section B.2.1.2(2).
" (5) Short-term relaxation losses at a temperature of the structure exceeding 6QOC can be 2 to 3 times
, ..those at 200C. However, in general, heat curing, over a short per;'Jd, may be considered to have
no effect on long term relaxation results (see Section B.5.5.5).
8.5.4.2 Susceptibility to Stress Corrosion
(1) The provisions of Section B.2.1.5.3 apply.
.
EBCS 2 -1995 137
j
i' ,
.
% of 0'..
It.O CI... I CWlr..)
I.
.
, ..0 CI... I C ..r.)
-.
-
.
.
! 4. 4.1 c CS"..,.I
.4
.I
I. I
.0 .0
Initial St~ (~I
Charact.ristic ten iii. Itr.ngth t..
Figure B-3 Relaxation Losses after 1000 h at 20 .,~;.
B.5.4.3 Temperature Dependent Behaviour
(I) For temperature dependent behaviour refer to relevant Standards on Fire Resistance.
B.5.5 Design of Members in Prestressed Concrete
.
B.5.5.1 General
(1) This section relates to structures where prestress is provided by fully bonded internal tendons. .
.(2) The effects of prestressing to be considered include:
t (a) minimum requirements for concrete classes (Section B.5.5.2)
(b) minimum requirements for prestressing units (Section B.5.5.3),
(c) determination of the relevant prestressing force (Section B.4.2)I
(d) initial prestressing force section (Section B.5.5.4)I
(e) loss of prestress (Section B.5.5.5)I
(t) transfer of prestressing forces and anchorage zone design for pre-tensioned members sectionI
(Section B.5.5.6)
(g) anchorage zones in post-tensioned members (Section B.5.5.7)
(3) The provisions Section B.4.3 should be applied in all calculations relating to the effects of
prestress both in global and local analysis and in section design for the ultimate and serviceability
limit states.
B.5.5.2 Minimum Strength Class for Prestressed Concrete
(1) The minimum class for post-tensioned members is C30, and for pre-tensioned members is C40. -
B.5.5.3 Minimum Number of Prestressing Units in Isolated Structural Elements -
(1) Isolated prestressed concrete members shall contain in the pre-compressed tensile zone a minimum
number of prestressing units in order to ensure that, with an adequate reliability, a failure of a certain
number of bars, wires or tendons does not lead to a failure of the member. .
138 EBCS 2 -1995
.
.(2) Item (1) above applies to structural prestressed members in which no additional load-carrying
capacity due to redistribution of internal forces and moments, transverse redistribution of loads or due
to other measures (e.g normal steel reinforcement) exists.
(3) The requirement of (1) above may be considered to be met if the minimum number of bars,wires
or tendons given in Table B.4 is provided. Table B.4 assumes equal diameters of all bars, wires or
tendons.
(4) The requirement may also be assumed to be satisfied if at least one strand with seven or more
wires (wire diameter ~ 4.0 rom) is provided in the isolated member.
(5) If the actual number of bars, wires or tendons in the isolated member is less than the values given
in Table B.4, adequate reliability against failure should be demonstrated.
,
Table B.4: Minimum Number of Bars, Wires and Tendons in the Pre-Compressed Tensile Zone
of Isolated Members
Type of Units Minimum number
Individual bars and wires 3
Bars and wires, forming a strand or a tendon 7
Tendons except strands (see Item (4) above) 3
.
B.5.5.4 Initial Prestressing Force
.(1) The initial prestressing force shall be determined in accordance with Section B.4.3, which also
lists relevant factors affecting loss of prestress.
(2) The maximum force applied to a tendon Po (i.e, the force at the active end, immediately after
stressing, x = 0, see section B.4.3.2) shall not exceed Ap.C1o.max, where:
Ap is the cross-sectional area of the tendon
C1o.max is the maximum stress applied to the tendon
C10.~ ~ 0.80 fpt or ~ 0.90 fpO.J;.'
whichever is the lesser (B.9)
(3) The prestressing force applied to the concrete immediately after tensioning (post-tensioning) or
after transfer (pre-tensioning), i.e, P InO = ApC1pno, shall not exceed the lesser of the forces determined
from:
ApC1pno = 0.75fpt Ap' or 0.85/p OoJ;.Ap (B. 10)
where C1pno is the stress in the tendon immediately after tensioning or transfer.
(4) For pre-tensioned members, P "',0' in (3) above, is calculated from Eq.(B.13) below:
-P""o = Po -APc -fj.lr (-APIJ. (x)) (B.11)
where AP c' and APIJ.(X) are defined in Section B.4.3.2.
.APlr is the short-term relaxation loss.
EBCS 2 -1995 139
-
(5) For post-tensioned members, P 111.0 is calculated from Eq.(B.14) below.
p 111.0 == Po -~p II -M c -Mp.(x)
(6) Methods for evaluating MJI, MIr'~c and 4PjJ.(x) are given in Section B.5.5.5.
(7) The minimum concrete strength required at the time of tensioning or stress transfer shall be If;
~ indicated in technical approval documents for the prestressing system concerned. Where such
documents do not exist, requirements concerning reliability and performance should be considered.
~c
~,\
(8) 1)e limiting values of (2) and (3) above are generally valid; they may be modified, however,
depending on a number of factors, e.g.
(a) whether it is possible to replace a damaged tendon,
(b) the consequences of the fracture of a tendons, in particular danger to human life.
(c) the stress levels in the concrete due to prestressing
(d) the grade of steel and type of tendon used,
(e) whether or not the tendons are subsequently bonded,
(t) the time when the grout is injected into the ducts,
(g) the possibility of achieving the required prestressing force in the tendon by overstressing
when unexpectedly high friction is met: in this exceptional case, the maximum initial force
Po may be increased to 0.95/p O.l~p.
B.S.S.S Loss of Prestress
(1) Loss of prestress shall be calculated in accordance with the principles in Section B.4.3.2.
(2) An estimate is required of the effective prestress at various stages considered in the design, and
hence an allowance has to be made for appropriate losses of prestress due to the different factors
given in Section B.4.3.2. Whenever possible, these calculations should be based on experience or
on experimental data relating to the materials and prestressing methods to be used. For a wide range
of structures, and in the absence of such data, the general recommendations given in (5)-(11) may be
used, in approximately estimating the total loss of prestress.
(3) It is recommended that the actual values of prestressing losses at tensioning should be checked by
measuring the prestressing force transferred from one end of the tendon to the other.
(4) Immediate losses should be calculated in accordance with (5) to (8) below. Time dependent losses
should be calculated in accordance with (9)-(10) below.
(5) Loss of prestress due to anchorage slip (M.J should be determined from experience and technical
approval documents relating to the prestressing system to be used.
(6) Calculation of the immediate loss of force in the tendons due to elastic deformation of the concrete
(M c) may be based on the values of the modulus of elasticity of the concrete given in Table 2.5 and -
on the values for the prestressing steel given in Section B.3.2.4.4.
For pre-tensioning, the losses of prestress should be calculated on a modular ratio basis, using the -
stress in the adjacent concrete.
.
140 EBCS 2 -1995 M
--
--
#
,-
.For post-tensioning, a progressive loss occurs when tendons are not stressed simultaneously. Where
gre<\ter accuracy is not required, this should be calculated on the basis of half the product of the
modular ratio and the stress in the adjacent concrete averaged along the length of the tendon.~.
(7) The short-term relaxation loss (4P ,,), which occurs in pre-tensioning between stressing the tendons
and transferring the stress to the concret.e, should be estimatoo using the data in section B.5.4.1.
(8) The loss of prestress in post-tensioned tendons due to friction [APJl.(x)] may be estimated from:
APJl.(x) = P D (1 -e-"'" + LzJ) (B.13)
where p. is the coefficient of friction between the tendons and their ducts
8 is the sum of the angular displacements over a distance x (irrespective of direction or
sign)
k is an unintentional angUlar displacement (per unit length) related to the profile of the
tendons.
p. depends on the surface characteristics of the tendons and the duct, on the presence of rust, on
the elongation of the tendon and on the tendon profile. In the absence of more exact data, for
tendoI1S which fill about 50% of the duct, the following values for ,~ may be ~.ssumoo, when using
Eq.(B-15).
cold drawn wire 0.17
strand 0.19
.deformed bar 0.65
smooth round bar 0.33
Values for k should be given in technical approval documents, and will generally be in the range
0.005 < k < 0.01 per meter. The value depends on the quality of workmanship, on the distance
between tendon supports, on the type of duct or sheath employed, and on the degree of vibration
\.\Sed in placing the concrete.
The above recommended values for It and k are mean values. The actual values used in design
may be .increased or decreased, depending on standards of control, workmanship, speci3l
precautions, etc., provided that the selected values can be justified.
(9) Time dependent losses should be calculated from:
Aa .Es{t, t.)Es + 4a,.. + nf>(t, t)(acI +0"'1KJ)
p. c' A A (B-14)
1 + n2[(1 + ~z~)(1 + 0.8 f>(t, t]
A 1
C C
where AO""c+.+r is the variation of stress in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation
at location x, at time t.
E.(t, t.J is the estimated shrinkage strain, derived from the values in Table 2.7 for
-final shrinkage.
n is EjE..
E. is the modulus of elasticity for the prestressing steel, taken nom Section
B.2.1.4.4.
Ecwo is the modulus of elasticity for the concrete Table 2.5
4a,.. is the variation of stress in the tendons at section x due to relaxation. This
.may be derived from Fig. B.4 for a ratio of Initial stress/characteristic tensile
stress, (a/l.-) calculated from:
EBCS 2 -1995 141
."".., , ~
'I
"'
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINO CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
0', z 0'". -O. 34tl,.~+,+, (B. IS)
where 0'". is the initial stress in the tendons due to prestress and permanent actions.
For simplificatiQn and conservatively, the secooo term in Eq.(B.1S) may be ignored. For
normal buildings, 0', may be taken as 0.85 0',..-
~(t. tj is a creep coefficient, as defined in Section 2.S.4
, 0'., is the stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight aOO any other
permanent actions.
O'cpo is the initial stress in the concrete adjacent to the teooons, due to prestress.
A, is the area of all the prestressing tendons at the level being considered.
A~ is the area of the concrete section.
I~ is the second moment of area of the concrete section.
Zqo is the distance between the center of gravity of the concrete section and the tendons.
In using Eq.(B.14), an assumed value of total loss will be required initially, to permit the term 4tl"..
on the right hand side to be evaluated (this term depends on the level of final prestress). An iterative
process is therefore necessary to solve and balance the two sides of Eq.(B.14).
(10) The loss of prestress calculated in accordance with above should be added to that determined by
above to assess the final prestress (P Ra). It is important to remember that these procedures are
approximate, and may be adjusted to suit particular materials, stressing or design conditions.
(11) The design procooures to take account of the effects of prestress should be in accordance with
Section B.4.3. ~
8.5.5.6 Anchorage Zones of Pretensioned Memben -
(1) Where tensile forces can occur, they should be carrioo by additional reinforcement.
(2) A distinction has to be made (see Fig. B-4(a between:
(a) Transmission length I.. over which the prestressing force (P J from a pretensionoo tendon
is fully transmittoo to the concrete.
(b) Dispersion length i 4' over which the concrete stresses gradually disperse to a linear
distribution across the concrete section.
(c) anchorage length I., over which the ultimate tendon force (F"..) in pretensionoo members is
fully transmittoo to the concrete.
(3) The transmission length I. is infIuencoo by the size and type of tendon, the surface condition of
the tendon, the concrete strength, the degree of compaction of the concrete. Values should be basoo
on experimental data or experience with the type of tendon to be usoo. For design purposes,i"
Fig. B-4(b) the transmission length is deflnoo as a multiple of the nominal diameter (fj of the strand
or wire.
I. = fJ.fj> (B. 16) .
For strands having a cross-sectional area ~ 100 mm2, and for indented wires with diameter ~ 8 IDID,
all complying with surface characteristics specifioo in relevant standards and tensionoo according to -
the values given in Section B.5.5.4, the fJ. values given in Table B.5 may be adoptoo. The concrete
strength taken should be that at the moment of transfer. Where the use of ribboo wires is proposoo,
~
142 EBCS 2 -1995 ~
, 0 ..
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETf
, -~ --I
with diameter ~ 12 mm, valua for ~. Ib(MI1d be baled on tat do; .a cuWSe, the valu. in
.Table B.S may be adOpted.
aD
~
~ I ' I G.Ift8&
~ 1 '\ 1
~ \ I
d ~ 1 \ , h
~ I \ I
,~ I ' I
~I bo I ~!!~.:.~!!~
10.811
, X
F1gure B-4 Tramfn- of rl'estnM in Prd~ J7'~';:;;:.
Table 8.5 Fadon~. to be taken for TrammiSlioo La1&th of PrstnSlinc StraDdI aDd
Wir5 (Smooth or Indented) in Relation to Cooaete Strm&tb at the Moment of
Transfn-
.Actual concrete strength at transfer
(MPa) 2S 30 35 40 4S 50
StraOOs and smooth or
~. indentOO wires 75 70 65 ~ 55 50
Ribbed wires 55 50 45 40 3S 30
(4) The design value I~ is to be taken at 0.8 I. or 1.2 I. whichever is less favorable for the eff~
considered.
(5) Transmission length, anchorage length and dispersion length are to be takm from the start of
effective bond.
Start of effective bond should be taken account of:
(a) tendons purposely debonded, at the end.
(b) a neutralized zone 1..0 in the case of sudden release
(6) For rectangular cross-sections and straight teOOons, situated near me bottom of the section, the
dispersion length can be established as:
1'4 .yPbpd + tf2 (B. 17)
(7) -:be anchorage of pretensioning tendons in flexural members at the ultimate limit state is
.influenced by the condition, cracked or uncracked, of the and1orage zone. The part of the b~
EBCS 2 -1995 143
ETHIOPIAN BUILDINO. CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE .
-
where tendons are anchored (Fig. B-4(a)] may be considered as uncracked if the concrete tensile .
stress at the Ultimate Limit State (flexural and principal stresses) does not exceed tlJ' taking account
of t..~e relevant value of PA, (see Section B.4.4.5).
(8) If the tensil~ stress does not exceedtlJ' the condition of anchorage may be assumed to be fulfilled
without further checks.
,
(8) If the tensile stress does not exceed tlJ' it should be shown that the envelope of the acting tensile
force does not exceed the resisting tensile force provided by the tendons and the reinforcing steel
within the anchorage zone. The ultimate resisting force F".. of the tendons according to Fig. B-8(b)
may be determined as:
F = ~P ~ ~~~ (B-18)
".. I 0 '\I
/f'Ii ",
Po as defined in Section B.4.3.2(1)
l/f'li as defined in above
Resisting iCrack
force
I
: : -TA. ~o:
I~ .
".
.~; .Fpx Po max
,
,. ~J x
Figure 8..5: Derivation of Eq. (B.t8)
D.S.S.7 Anchorage Zon~ of Post-tensioned Members
(1) The design of anchorage zones shall be in accordance with the procedures in this section and those
Sections B.4.3, B.5 B.6.5, B.6.6 and B.7 .1.
(2) When considering the effects of the prestress as a concentrated force on the anchorage zone, the
characteristic tensile strength of the tendon shall be used.
(3) The bearing stress behind anchorage plates should be calculated in accordance Section B.6.7 .1.
(4) Tensile forces due to concentrated forces should be assessed by a strut and the tie model, or other
appropriate representation (see Section B.4.2). The resulting reinforcement should be detailed in -
accordance with Section B.6.5 assuming that it is acting at its design strength.
(5) The prestressing force may be assumed to disperse at an angle of spread 2{3 (see Fig. B-6) starting ~
at the end of the anchorage device, where {3 may be assumed to be arc tangent 2/3.
144 EBCS 2 -1995
-
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE' -
~ ,
0) .'
!
I
i
b J [B. afC 10"(2/3) rJJ.i-l J
p I
iI
l ;;
i
'
I "
,
\ t
: ~
;
'. '
I \
Figure B-6 Dispersion of Prestress i :
OJ
.."
':
8.5.5.8 Design for Shear i
\
8.5.5.8.1 Members with Inclined Prestressing Tendons '
(1) Taking into account the effect of inclined prestressing tendons, the design shear force is given by:
.V- = V~ -V~ (B. 19)
where V pd denotes the force component of the inclined prestressed tendons, parallel to V,..
-V pd is taken as positive in the same direction as V,.. .,;
(2) Equation B.19 applies in combination with Eqs.4.29 and 4.30.
(3) Concerning the value Vpi in Eq.B.19, two cases should be distinguished: :
Case 1: The stresses in the tendons do not exceed the characteristic strengthf~.lk '
The relevant prestressing force is the mean value P"" allowing for losses.
(see Section B.4.3.2(1)) multiplied by the relevant safety coefficient (generally 'Yp = 0.9).
Case 2: The steel stress in the tendons exceeds f~.1k
The prestressing force is calculated withf~.lk ry..
(4) In shear analysis, the effective depth d is calculated ignoring the inclined tendons.
-B.5.5.9 Limit State of Cracking
(1) All relevant provisions in Section 5.3 shall apply.
!
.EBCS 2 -1995 145
.ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCRETE
.
.B.5.5.9.1 General
~! (1) The durability of prestressed members may, for humid and sea water of aggressive chemical
" environment types of exposure, be more critically affected by cracking. In the absence of more
ti ~~ailed requirements the design crack width Wk under the frequent load combination may be taken
, (a) 0.2 mm for both post-tensioned and pre-tensioned members for dry exposure.
(b) 0.2 mm for post-tensioned and decompression for pre-tensioned members for humid
exposure.
.(c) Decompreesion or coating of tendons and 0.2 mm for post-tensioned members.
(d) The decompression limit requires that, under the frequent combination of loads, all ~arts of
the tendons or duct lie at least 25 mm within concrete in. compression.
B.5.5.9.2 Minimum Reinforcement Areas
(1) In prestressed members subject to compressive normal force the minimum reinforcement area may
be reduced below that necessary for ordinary reinforced concrete due to the influence of:
(a) the increased flexural stiffness of the compression zone, and
(b) the contribution of the prestressing tendons.
(2) I~ prestressed members, the minimum reinforcement for crack control is not necessary in areas
where,' under the rare combination of actions and the relevant estimated characteristic value of
prestress or normal force, the concrete remains in compression.
(3) If the conditions in (2) above are not fulfilled, the required minimum area should be calculated
according to Section 5.3.2(3) with the following values for kc.
(a) For box sections
kc = 0.4 for webs
= 0.8 for the tension chord
(b) For rectangular sections, the value of kc may be interpolated between 0.4 for pure bending
without normal force and zero when
(i) the condition just satisfy (2) above, or
(ii) where, under the action of the relevant estimated value of prestress, the depth of the
tension zone, calculated on the basis of a cracked section under the loading conditions
leading to formation of the first crack, does not exceed the lesser of h/2 or 0.5 m.
(4) Prestressing tendons may be taken into account as minimum reinforcement within a 300 mm
square surrounding the tendon, provided that the difference bond behaviour of the tendons and
reinforcement are taken into account. In the absence of better information, this may be done by
assuming prestressing tendons to be 50% effective.
B.5.9.9.3 Control of Cracking without Direct Calculation
(1) For prestressed slabs in buildings subjected to bending without significant axial tension, measures -
specifically to control cracking are not necessary where the overall depth does not exceed 200 mm
and the provisions Section 7.2.2 have been applied. -
\
(2) For prestressed concrete sections, Section 5.3.4.2 and Table 5.2 may be applied with
Wk = .2 mIn. The stresses in the reinforcement should be calculated regarding the prestress as an
external force without allowing for stress increase in the tendons due to loading. .
146 EBCS 2 -1995 i1R- -
~
,
.B.6 Dfi An..ING PROVISIONS r
I ~
I ~:
B.6.1 ArranI8D81t or the Prestraslnl Volta
1 l
(1) In the case of pre-tenaionini, the tendons shall be spaced apart. !, f
('2) In the case of post-tensioned members, bundled ducts are not nonnally permitted. ,[ f
" .
" t
(3) A pair of ducts, placed vertically on above the other, may be used if adequate precautions are ! f
taken for teosioninl and aroutlni. Particular care is necessary if the tendons are doubly curved. \ f
t
j
B.6.2. Conaete Cov- ,
1
! .'
(1) The concrete cover between the inner surface of the formwork and either a pre-tensioned tendon I
or 1 duct shall be fixed with due regard to the size of the tendons of the duct. Minimum covers shall i
~ in accordance with Section 7.1.3, in addition to the following: t
.~
".
(I) For pre-tensioned members, the minimum cover shall not be less then 2~, where ~ is the :,
diameter of a tendon. Where ribbed wires are used, the minimum cover shall not be less then
3~.
(b) For post-tensioned members, the minimum cover is to the duct. The cover shall not be less
than the diameter of the duct. For rectangular ducts, the cover shall not be less than the lesser
dimension of the duct cross-section nor half the greater dimension of the duct.
B.6.3 Horizontal and Vertical Spacing
(1) The spacing of ducts or of pre-tensioned tendons shall be such as to ensure that placing and
compacting of the concrete can be carried out satisfactorily and that good bond can be attained
between the concrete and the tendons.
B.6.3.1 ~nsioning
(1) The minimum clear horizontal and vertical spacing of individual tendons is given in Fig. B- 7.
B.6.3.2. Pos~nsioning
(1) Except for pair~ ducts (see Section B.5.1.1(3, the minimum clear spacing between individual
ducts should be:
(a) Horizontal: ~ ~ 40 mm
(b) Vertical: ~ ~ SO mID
where ~ denotes the diameter of the duct.
-B.6.4 Anchorages and Couplers for Prestressing Tendons
(1) The anchorage devices used for post-tensioned tendons and the anchorage lengths in the case of
-pre-tensioned tendons shall be such as to enable the full design strength of the tendons to be
J developed, taking account of any repeated, rapidl-" changing action effects.
(2) Where couplers are used, these shall be so placed by taking account of the interference caused by
.theses devices, i.e. that they do not affect the bearing capacity of the member and that any temporary
anchorage which may be needed during construction can bf'- introduced in satisfactory manner.
-
EBCS 2 -1995 147
..,it
"'
':-
;:'
, C;,"
'.
APPENDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE ~
,c.
i:
!c
.I;
B.' Dgf AnmG PROVISIONS 1
I ~
I ~;
B.'.1 MranI8nmt of the Prestrsslnl Units III
(1) In the case of pre-tenai~nin8' the tendons shall be spaced apart.. \ t
("2) In the case of post-tensloned members, bundled ducts are oot oonnally pennltted. "
f
(3) A pair of ducts, placed vertically on above the other, may be used if adequate precautions are ~ ~
taken for tensiOnlna and JroUtin8. Particular care is necessary if the tendons are doubly ~rved. :j t
,
,
B.'.2 Cona'ete COYS' :~
(1) The concrete cover between the inner surface of the formwork and either a pre-tensioned tendon ~
or 1 duct shall be fixed with due regard to the size of the tendons of the duct. Minimum covers shall ~
be in accordance with Section 7.1.3, in addition to the following: t
.f-
(I) For pre-tensioned members, the minimum cover shall not be less then 2<p, where <p is the t;
diameter of a tendon. Where ribbed wires are used, the minimum cover shall not be less then ~.
3<p. '
(b) For post-tensioned members, the minimum cover is to the duct. The cover shall not be less
than the diameter of the duct. For rectangular ducts, the cover shall not be less than the lesser
dimension of the duct cross-section nor half the greater dimension of the duct.
B.'.3 Horizontal and Vertical Spacing
(1) The spacing of ducts or of pre-tensioned tendons shall be such as to ensure that placing and
compacting of the concrete can be carried out satisfactorily and that good bond can be attained
between the concrete and the tendons.
B.6.3.1 ~nsioning
(1) The minimum clear horizontal and vertical spacing of individual tendons is given in Fig. B- 7.
B.6.3.2 Pos~nsioning
(1) Except for pair,c;t ducts (see Section B.5.1.1(3)), the minimum clear spacing between individual
ducts should be:
(a) Horizontal: <p '2: 40 mm
(b) Vertical: <p '2: 50 mm
where <p denotes the diameter of the duct.
B.6.4 Anchorages and Couplers for Prestressing Tendons
(1) The anchorage devices used for post-tensioned tendons and the anchorage lengths in the case of
.pre-tensioned tendons shall be such as to enable the full design strength of the tendons to be
v developed, taking account of any repeated, rapidl! changing action effects.
(2) Where couplers are used, these shall be so place(! by taking account of the interference caused by
.theses devices, i.e. that they do not affect the bearing capacity of the member and that any temporary
anchorage which may be needed during construction can bt"- introduced in satisfactory manner.
EBCS 2 -1995 147
.
/
..L
"T8 8, :~.
.r1-C1Onwn
1-1
..c d-..t. 5"""
, c ~
c 2Omm
F1aure &..7 Minimum Clear Spadna r.. PretenJ1CM1ed TeDdca
(3) Calculations for local effects in the CODCl'de aM for the tnDIvene reinforr~ ~d be made
in accordance with Section B.4.2.
(4) In general, couplers should be located away from intermediate suPJX}rts.
(5) The placing of couplers on so~ or DX>re of the teOOoDs at one crou-section should be avoided.
B.6.5 Anchorage Zones for P.-t-Tensionina orcs
(I) Anchorage zon~ should always be provided with distributed reinforcemeDt near all surfaces in
the form of an orthogonal mesh.
(2) Where groups of post-tensionOO cables are located at a certain distance from each other, suitable
links should be arranged at the eOOs of the members, u a protection against splitting.
.
(3) At any part of the zone, the reinforcement ratio on either side of the block should be at least
O.IS~ in both directions.
(4) AIl reinforcement should be fully anchored.
(5) Where a strut and tie Ioodel has been used to determine the tr3DSverse ~ile force, the following
detailing rules should be followed:
(a) The steel area actually required to provide the tie force, acting at its design strength, should
be distributed in accordance with the actual tensile stress distribution, i.e. over a length of
the block approximately equal to its greatest lateral dimension.
(b) Closed stirrups should be used for anchorage purposes.
(c) AIl the anchorage reinforcement should preferably be formed into a 3-dimensional orthogonal
grid.
(6) Special attention should be given to anchorage zones having cross sections different in shape from
that of the general cross-section of the beam.
B.7 CONSfRUCTlON AND WORKMANSIUP
B.7.1 Obj~ves
(I) This Sectionp~ovides, in addition to those given in Chapter 8 of this Code, minimum specification \
requirements for prestressing steel and for the standard of wor~~ip that must be achieved on site
in order to ensure that the design assumptions in this Code are valid and hence that the intelKled levels
of safety and of durability will be attained. .
148 EBCS 2 -1995
.
~ APPEDIX B: PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
.B.7.2 Basic Requirements
(1) Prestressing steel shall comply with the requirements of Section B.2.1 of this Code.
(2) The prestressing devices (anchorages, couplers, sheaths and ducts) shall comply with the
requirements of Section B.2.2 of this Code.
(3) The tendons (wire, bars, cables), anchorage devices, couplers and sheaths used shall be those in j
the project design documents. They shall be capable of being identified as such.
B.7.3 Transport and Storage of the Tendons
(1) Tendons, sheaths, anchorage devices and couplers shall be protected from harmful influences
during transport and storage and also when placed in the structure, until after concreting has taken I
place. ' ,
(2) During transport and storage of the tendons, the following should be avoided:
(a) any type of chemical, electro-chemical or biological attack liable to cause corrosion;
(b) any damage to the tendons; ::
(c) any contamination liable to affect the durability or bond properties of the tendons; t
(d) any defonnation of the tendons, not provided for the design; :
(e) any unprotected storage, exposure to rain or contact with the ground; :~,
(t) the use of water transport without suitable packaging; !
.(g) welding in the vicinity of prestressing tendons without the provision of special protection r
(from splashes). I'
I
.'t
(3) For sheaths, the following should be taken into consideration: )
(a) local damage and corrosion inside should be avoided;
(b) water-tightness should be ensured; ;~..
(c) it should be resistant to mechanical and chemical attack. ,
!
,
B.7.4 Fabrication of Tendons J
i
(1) The devices used in jointing the tendons, for their anchorage and coupling shall be as specified
in relevant Standards. The prestressing members shall be assembled and placed in position in
accordance with the relevant Standards. The sheaths and their connections shall be as specified in the
project design documents.
(2) Particular consideration should be given to:
(a) maintaining the identification marks on all materials;
(b) the appropriate methods for cutting;
(c) the straight entry into the anchorage and couPlers as required by the manufacturer;
(d) assembly;
(e) transportation; when lifting by crane, any local crushing or bending of the tendons should be
avoided.
~ B.7.5 Placing of the Tendons
(1) Placing of the tendons shall be carried out in compliance with the criteria relating to:
..
(a) the concrete cover and the spacing of the tendons;
.EBCS 2 -1995 149
c
-
(b) the permissible toleranc-es in respect of the position of the tendons, couplers and anchorages; .
(c) the ease with which the concrete can be cast.
(2) The tolerances required for the placing of the prestressing tendons shall be those given in Section
8.2. alternatively they shall be stated in the contract documents.
(3~ The sheaths should be fixed carefully according to the designer's specification of dimensions,
spacers and supports.
(4) After placing the sheaths in position, vents should be provided at both ends and at their high
points, as well as at all points where air or water may accumulate; in the case of sheaths of
considerable length, vents are also needed at intermediate positions.
(5) The sheaths should be protected from penetration of extraneous materials until the completion of
grouting.
B.7.6 Tensioning of the Tendons
(1) Prestressing shall be in accordance with a pre-arranged stressing program.
(2) Written instructions shall be provided at the site or in the works on the prestressing procedure to
followed.
(3) Workmen and staff engaged in stressing shall be skilled and have had special training.
.
(4) During prestressing, suitable safety measures should be taken and be recorded by an engineer.
.
B.7.6.1 Pre-tensioning
(1) In ~e case of pre-tensioning the instructions for prestressing shall specify:
(a) the prestressing tendons and the prestressing devices;
(b) any special sequence in which the prestressing tendons are to be tensioned;
(c) the jack pressure or the forces at the jacks which must not be exceeded;
(d) the final pressure which must be attained after stressing has been completed or the
corresponding forces at the jack;
(e) the maximum permissible extension of the tendons and slip in the anchorage;
(t) the manner and sequence in which the tendons are to be released;
(g) the required concrete strength at the time of release, which should be checked;
(h) operational suitability of re-useable anchorage components.
(2) the necessity for temporary protection of the tendons after tensioning and before casting should
be checked. Where necessary, the protective material should not affect bond and should have no
detrimental effect on the steel or the concrete.
B.7.6.2 Post-tensioning
(1) The following shall be specified by the designer: .
\
(a) the prestressing process to be employed;
U (b) the type and grade of the prestressing steel;
(c) the number of bars or wires in the individual tendons; .
150 EBCS 2 -1995 &
'I
.(d) the required concrete strength prior to tensioning;
(e) the order in which successive tendons should be tensioned, specifying the location where the
tension is to be applied;
(t) where appropriate, the time of the removal of the falsework during tensioning;
(g) the force required to be developed at the jack;
(h) the design elongation required;
(I) the maximum slip;
0) the number, type and location of couplers.
(2) The following should be recorded by the supervising engineer during the tensioning process:
(a) the type of prestressing devices used which should be calibrated;
(b) the elongation measured on site;
(c) the measured pressure in the jacks; 1
(d) the observed value of slip; :
(e) the deviation of the measured values from the design values; :1
(t) the actual concrete strength;
(g) the actual order in which successive tendons are tensioned;
(h) where appropriate, the time at which the formwork has been removed.
B.7.7 Grouting and other Protective Measur~
(1) Tendons placed in sheaths or ducts in the concrete, couplers and anchorage devices shall be
protected against corrosion.
.
(2) should the delay between stressing and grouting exceed the time permitted, then protection of the
.tendons shall continue until grouting takes place.
(3) Where temporary protection is provided, the material used shall have an approval document and
shall not have a deleterious effect on the prestressing steel or on the cement grout.
(4) Written instructions shall be provided for the site or the works for the preparation and execution
of the grouting.
(5) Corrosion protection of the tendons is ensured by filling all voids with a suitable grouting material
: (usually cement mortar); as a rule, the anchorage should be enveloped in concrete or mortar. This
I objective is met by:
(a) using approved grout materials (must remain alkaline, no harmful components) and by
covering the tendons completely;
(b) filling the ducts completely (including voids between tendons) with a grout which after
hardening fulfills the structural requirements (strength, bond, modulus of elasticity,
! shrinkage).
B.7 .7.2 Cement Grout
~
(1) The cement grout used shall have adequate properties, for example:
I
j (a) high fluidity and cohesion when plastic;
(b) low shrinkage deformation when hardening;
(c) no loss of fines ("bleeding").
I
.
ETHIOPIAN BUILDING CODE STANDARD FOR STRUCTURAL USE OF CONCREtE
.
(2) Approp~iate materials (typ~ of cement, admixtur~) shall be used and the mixing process
(batching, water-cement ratio. procedure, time) shall ensure the required properti~.
(c) Chlorides (as ~ by mass cement) from all sourcea shall not exceed the values given in the
specified Standards.
,
B.7 .7.3 Instructions to the SIte
(1) Before grouting starts, the following preconditions shall be fulfilled:
(a) equipment operational (including .stand by. grout pump to avoid intemlptions in the event.
.of malfunction)
(b) permanent suppli~ of water under pressure and of compressed air;
(c) materials hatched (excess to allow for overflow) ,
(d) ducts free of harmful material (e.g. water); .
(e) vents pr~ed and identified;
(t) preparation of control tests for grout;
(a) in ClSe of doubt, grouting trail on representative ducts;
(h) groutflow not affected.
(2) The grouting program shall specify:
(a) the characteristics of the equipment and the grout;
(b) order of blowing and washing operations;
(c) order of grouting operations and fresh grout tests (fluidity, segregation);
(d) grout volume to be prepared for each stage of injection;
(e) precautions to keep ducts clear;
(t) instructions in the event of incidents and harmful climatic conditions;
(h) where necessary, additional grouting.
B.7 .7.4 Grouting Operations
(1) Before injecting, it should be checked that the grouting program can be fulfilled.
(2) The injecting process should be carried out at a continuous and steady rate. In some circumstance:
(large diameter, vertical or inclined ducts) post-injection may be necessary to replace bleed water b:
grout.
(3) After completion of grouting, loss of grout from the duct should be prevented. To allow expansiol
of grout during hardening and to displace bleed water, appropriate vents may be opened.
(4) After injecting, if large voids are suspected, the effectiveness of grouting should be checked witJ
appropriate equipment.
B.7 .7.5 Sealing
-.
(1) Where nec~';~J" all openings, grouting tube.; and vents shall be sealed hermetically to preven
penetration of water and harmful products.
,.
152 EBCS 2.. 1996
.
~ ~ APPE~~~~SSED~~~~
.B.7 .7.6 Other Protections
(1) Tendons may be protected by materials based on binamen, eI'Oxy resins, rubber, ac, provided that
there are no detrimental effects on bond, rIte resistance, aOO other essential p~~es.
B.8 QUALITY CONTROL
B.8.1 Objediva
(1) This Section provides, in addition to those given in Chapter 9 of this Code, the minimum control
measures for design and construction of prestressed concrete members. They comprise essential ;'1'
actions and decisions, as well as check to be made, in compliance with specifications, standards aOO ~,;if,
the general state-of-the-art, to ensure that all specified requirements are met. tiC'
,-
,
1, c
B.8.2 Compliance Contro~ j
".
~'::
(1) For prestressing steels and prestressing devices, Section B.7 shall apply. ~i
'~i'~
B.8.2 Control prior to Cona-ding and during Pr~tressing tt
(1) Before being placed in position, the tendons should for any damage that might have occurred since ' ~1
arrival on site or at the factory. t:
r
.(3) Before tensioning it is advisable to check that the prestressing operation can be carried out t
correctly. Checks should be made that the requirements of Section B.7.6 are being met, at the time 1
.of transfer of -the prestressing force. ~
"
"
(4) A prestressing record should be kept of the measurement made at each stage of stressing (pressure
in the jacks, elongations, slippage at the anchorages, etc.). ! , 1 ,c
I'
(5) The time elapsed betWeen prestressing and the completion of the protective measures for the steel (
(grouting) should be controlled and noted. \:
Before grouting, it should be ensured that the provisions of Sections B.7. 7.3 and B.7. 7.4 are applied i"
and checked. \
{
.
(6) During grouting it is necessary to check the injection pressure, the free flow of the grout from '
the vents, to look for grout leaks, to check the quantity of injectoo grout as well as to take samples
for checking viscosity and loss of water. Where necessary, the strength of the grout should be
checkoo.
J
c C
.
*
EBCS 2 .1995 153
'..cl
,
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEn BLANK]
c
154 EBCS 2 -1995
.
INDEX
, .
Cement 89 93 f'..
, j.
Accidental actions 18, 20 Cement grout 150 i,
Accidental situations 18 Characteristic compressive cube strength 9 ~$:
Actions 18-21,23 Characteristic crack width 61 ~
Additional eccentricity 39 Characteristic cylinder Ii;.
Admixtures 91 compressive strength 9
Aggregates 89, 94 Characteristic strength 21
Allowance for imperfections 32 Characteristic strength of concrete 21
Alternate design method 24 Characteristic strength of
Amplified sway moments method reinforcing steel 13
for sway frames 40, 41 Characteristic tensile strength 10
Analysis of flat slab structures 119 Characteristic values 19
Analysis of line elements 24 Characteristic yield stress 13
Analysis of sections 29 Check tests 105
Analysis of slabs 107 Check tests on structural concrete 104
Analysis of sway frames 38 Circular columns 41
Anchorage 14,69,71, 78, 81, 126, 134 Circular ties 86
Anchorage length 78~82, 144 Classification and geometry of
Anchorage of bottom reinforcement reinforcing steel 13
at supports 82 Classification of concrete works 1
Anchorage zones 127, 137, 144, 144, 147 Classification of structures 34
Anchorage zones for post-tensioning forces 147 Closed links 49
Anchorage zones of post-tensioned members 144 Coefficient of thennal expansion 12, 13, 124
Anchorage zones of pretensioned members 144 Coiled products 124
.Anchorages 125, 146 Column strip 119
Applied load effect 53 Columns 25, 35, 84
Approximate method 43 Combination of actions 23
.Arches 25 Combination value 20
Arrangement of the prestressing units 145 Combination values 19
Assessment of results 106 Combined action-effects 49
Axial load capacity 66 Compatibility torsion 48
Bars 124, 147 Completed structure .102
Basic anchorage length 78 Compliance controls 102, 150
Basis of design 17. 29, 127 Compliance controls for the
Batching 94 completed structure 102
Beams 25, 45 Compliance criteria 104
Bearing 70 Composition of the concrete 91
Bending 49 Compression members 31, 36
Bending moment coefficients 115, 122 Compression reinforcement 31
Bending of bars 75 Compressive strength of concrete 9
Biaxial bending of columns 43 Concentrated forces 72
Bond 14, 77 Concrete construction rules 93
Bond forces 75 Concrete cover 75, 99, 145
Bonded tendons 127 Constituent materials of concrete 89
Braced frames 32, 35 Construction joints 95
Braced walls 63, 66 Construction procedures 102
Bracing system 35 Continuous deep beams 66
Buckling curves 43 Continuous slabs 114
Bundled bars 81 Control for curing the concrete 101
Bursting forces 73 Control of cracking 145
; Cables 147 Control of mixing 101
Calculation of deflections 56 Control prior to concreting 150
.
EBCS 2 -1995 155
.
.Conversion factors for strength 10 Distribution of concentrated loadll 107
Corbels 68, 87 Distribution of design moments 117
~
Comer column 53 Dry environment 59,80
Couplers 125, 134, 146, 1~7 Ductility 13, 14, 127, 132
Crack formation 59 Ductility characteristics 124
Crack widths 59 Ducts 127, 147
Cracking due to shear 63 Durability I, 58, 91, 99
Cracks due to flexure 59 Edge beams 26
Creep 11,25,42,56, 137 Edge column 53
Creep coefficient 11 Edge panels 119
Critical load ratio 34 Effect of creep 42
Cn'tical section for shear 44 Effective buckling length 36
Critical section for torque 49 Effective column 43
~bical specimens 9 Effective depth 55
Curing of concrete 92, 97 Effective flange width 26
Curtailment of longitudinal Effective height 64, 66
flexural reinforcement 81 Effective span length 26
Deep beams- 31,66, 87 Effective width 26,47, 107
Deep shear spans 67 Effects of actions 21
Deflection 55 Effects of prestressing 127, 130
Deflecti~ns 18 Effects of time dependent
Deformation pr,operties of concrete 10 deformation of concrete 137
Deformations 18 Elastic values of support moments 116
Density 124 Equilibrium torsion 48
Depth of lift 94 Equivalent diameter 81
Depth of plain concrete footing 70 Equivalent frame method 115
Design bond strength 77 Equivalent geometric imperfections 32
Design for shear 66, 149 Equivalent hollow section 48, 49
Design of footings 70 Equivalent reinforcement areas 41
Design of isolated columns 39 Equivalent wall thickness 49 .
Design of members in prestressed concrete 137 Fabrication 98
Design of plain concrete walls 66 Fabrication of tendons 148
Design of plane elements 27 Fabrication of the reinforcement 97
Design of reinforced concrete walls 63 Factors for adjusting span moments 117
Design of sections 130 Falsework 95
Design of shear reinforcement 46 Fatigue 14, 45, 98, 125, 126, 134
Design of torsional reinforcement 49 Final creep coefficient 12
Design procedures 32 Final shrinkage strains 12
Design situations 18 First-order analysis 38, 40
Design strength 21 First-order design moment 41
Design strength for concrete 22 First-order eccentricity 39
Design strength for steel 22 First-order theory 32, 34
Design values of actions 20 Fixed actions 18
Design values of the effects of actions 21 Flange in compression 47
-Designed mixes 89 Flange in tension 47
Detailing of reinforcement 75 Flat slabs 28,53, 107, 119
Detailing of structural members 83 Flexural members 31
Detailing provisions 75, 145 Flexural reinforcement 69,71, 84
Diagonal compression 49 Footing depth 70
Diagonal compression failure 44 Footings 68, 70
Diagonal tension 44, 47 Footings on two piles 71
Diameter of ties 84 Formwork 91,95
Diameter of vertical bars 87 Frame 34
Dispersion length 144 Frame stability 38 '
Distance between lateral supports 31 Free actions 18
156 EBCS 2 -1995
f .c
r?; , " i ~ ,
Frequency of sampling 102 Load arrangements 24 i ;
, Frequent values 19, 20 Load cases 24:
Fresh concrete 91 Load tests of structure 105 t
Geometry of reinforcing steel 13 Loaded area 50 i
Grades of concrete 9 Loads on supporting beams 116
Grouting 150 Local forces 71
Grouting operations 150 Long term deflections 57
High bond bars 14 Longitudinal bars 84
High ductility 14 Longitudinal cracks 125
Holes in areas bounded by column strips 122 Longitudinal reinforcement 49, 83, 81, 84
Holes in areas common to a column strip Longitudinal shear .46
and a middle strip 122 Longitudinal stresses 49
Holes in areas common to two column strips 122 Longitudinal torsional reinforcement 49
Hollow sections 49 Loops 83
Horizontal and vertical spacing 146 Loss of prestress 144
Horizontal reinforcement 87 Margins of strength 104
Hot weather concreting 91 Materials 1, 21, 89, 101
Humid environment .59, 80 Maximum aggregate size 77
Idealized bi-tinear diagram 132 Maximum bar diameter 59
Idealized stress-strain diagram for concrete 29 Maximum cement content 92
Immediate deflections 56 Maximum reinforcement ratio 83
Imperfections 24, 32 Maximum spacing 63, 83
Inclined compression 47 Measurements during the tests 105
Inclined shear reinforcement 46 Mechanical properties 124, 126
Inclined stimlps 46 Mechanical properties of prestressing steel 132
Indirect actions 19 Mechanical properties of reinforcing steel 14
.Indirect supports 73 Members subjected to axial tension 45
Initial prestressing force 143 Members subjected to significant
Initial sway imperfections 34; 35 axial compression 45
.Inspection of materials 101 Members with inclined prestressing tendons 149
Inspection prior to concreting 101 Members without significant axial forces 45
Instructions to the site 150 Middle strip 119
Interior column 54 Minimum cement content 92
Internal panels 117 Minimum concrete cover 75
Isolated columns 34, 42 Minimum concrete strength 143
Isolated prestressed concrete members 137 Minimum cover requirements 59, 80
Joints 83, 81,95,98 Minimum diameter 75
Lap joints ~1 Minimum diameter of bend 75
Lap length 83 Minimum effective depth 56
Laps 83 Minimum flange thickness 25
Lateral reinforcement 84 Minimum footing depth 70
Lean concrete 9 Minimum number of bars 84, 143
Limit state of crack formation 59 Minimum number of longitudinal
Limit state of crack widths 59 reinforcing bars 84
Limit state of cracking 149 Minimum reinforcement 58, 59, 84, 149
Limit state of deflection 55 Minimum shear reinforcement 44
Limit states 17 Minimum strength class for
Limit states of cracking 58 prestressed concrete 137
Limiting value of ultimate torque 49 Minimum thickness 71
Limits of slenderness 36 Minimum torsional reinforcement 49
Limits on deflection 55 Minimum web reinforcement 83
Line elements 24 Mixing 94
I Linear analysis 27 Modulus of elasticity 11, 14, 125, 132
Linear elastic theory 24 Moment coefficients 113
Linear methods 130 Moment in footin2s 68
-EBCS 2 -1995 157
"
Moment in pile caps 71 Protectivtl mtla!iurtl!i 150
Moment magnification tactor 40 Punching 44, 50, 70
Moment transfer between slab and column 119 Punching resistanctl 53
Moment transfer between slabs and columns 54 Quality control 101, 150
Multi-axial stresses 125, 134 Quasi-permanent value 20
Negative moments at free edge 122 Quasi-permanent values 19
Non-<:ompliance 102 Rectanglar diagram 29
Non-linear analysis 27 Rectangular columns 41
Non-sway frames 32, 36, 38 Redistribution of moments 26
'Non-sway mode 36 Reinforced concrete walls 63
Nonnal ductility 14 Reinforcing steel 13, 94
<?ne-way footings 69 Reinforcing steel construction rultls 97
One-way slabs 107 Relative eccentricity 43
Opening in panels 122 Relaxation 125, 134
Openings in slabs 52 Relaxation losses 134
Panel moments 108 Removal of formwork and falsework 96
Panel with marginal beams 126 Representative values of accidental actions 20
Parabolic-rectangular diagram 29 R~presentative values of actions 19
Partial safety factors 23 Representative values of permanent actions 19
Partial safety factors for action 127 Representative values of variable actions 20
Partial safety factors for materials 22, 127 Requirements for effective depth 55
Particular Cases 71 Requirements for loops 83
Pedestals 70 Requirements of fresh concrete 91
Permanent actions 18, 19 Resistance to diagonal tension 47
Persistent situations 18 Resistance to inclined compression 47
Physical properties of prestressing steel 132 Rib spacing 25, 84
Physical properties of reinforcing steel 13 Ribbed bars 13, 14
Pile caps 71 Ribbed slabs 84
Placement of concrete 101 Ribbed wires 147
Placing of concrete 91, 94 Sampling 102
Placing of steel 98 Sealing 150
Placing of tendons 148 Secant modulus of elasticity 11
Plain concrete footing 70 Second-order eccentricity 39
Plain concrete pedestal 70 Second-order effects 25, 27, 32, 36
Plain concrete walls 66 Second-order elastic global analysis 38
Plane elements 27 Second-order theory 32
Plane frames 34 Secondary reinforcement 84
Plastic analysis 27 Section design 132
Plates 25 Segregation 94
Poisson's ratio 11 Seismic design 1
Post-tensioned members 129, 143, 145, 149 Sequence of measures 102
Post-tensioning forces 127 Service values 19
Pre-tensioned members 129, 143, 145 Serviceability 1
Pre-tensioning 149 Serviceability limit state 25
Prescribed mixes 89 Serviceability limit states 17, 22, 24, 25, 48, 55
Prestressed concrete 1, 129 Shear 17,22,48,49,62,70,71
Prestressed slabs 127 Shear carried by deep shear spans 67
Prestressed steel 129 Shear crack width 62
Prestressing 18 Shear force coefficients 112, 122
Prestressing steel 132 Shear in footings 70
Prestressing devices 129, 125, 147 Shear reinforcement 46, 83
Prestressing force 129 Shear resistance of concrete 45
Prestressing steel 132 Shear resistance of plain walls 66
Prestressing tendons 146 Shear resistance of reinforced walls 64
Production control 101 Shear spans 66
158 EBCS 2 -1995
" '". ,"""~
~
Shear strength of deep shear spans 67 Tend,ons 129, 134, 143, 147, 148 I~
Sheaths 127,147 Tensllestrength 14 I'
Short walls 63 Tensile zone of isolated members 143 f
Short-term relaxation losses 135 Tensioning of the tendons 148 i
Shrinkage 11.25.56,137 Test loads 105
Shrinkage strain 11 Testing methods 102
Simplified method 122 Thickness of deep beams 87
Slabs 25. 45, 84, 107 Thin walls 48
Slender braced walls 66 Ties 83, 84
Slender columns 43 Time dependent effects 25
Slender walls 63 Tolerances 98, 148
Slenderness ratio 35, 39 Tolerances for concrete cover 99
Smooth bars 13 Tolerances for construction purposes 99
Solid slabs 107 Torques 48
Spacing of horizontal bars 87 Torsion 48, 49
Spacing of lateral supports 31 Torsion at comers 115, 112
Spacing of reinforcement 77 Torsional eccentricity 40
Spacing of vertical bars 87 Torsional reinforcement 49, 83
Spatial variation 18 Torsional resistance 48, 49
Special structural elements 63 Total eccentricity 39
Specification of concrete 89 Transient situations 18
Spe,cification of reinforcement 93 Transmission length 144
Staggering rule 81 Transmission reinforcement 76
Standard mixes 89 Transport 97
Stiffness 26 Transport of tendons 147
,Stirrups 46, 49, 62, 83, 83 Transportation of concrete 101
Storage 97 Transporting 94
# Storage of tendons 147 Transverse reinforcement 46, 87
Story buckling load 41 Transverse ribs 25, 84
Strain distribution 29 Transverse spacing 83
, Strands 124 Two-way action 44
Stress corrosion 125, 137 Two-way rectangular footings 69
Stress-strain diagram for steel 31 Two-way slabs 101
Stress-strain diagrams 11, 14, 124, 132 Two-way square footings 69
Structural concrete 102 Types of check tests 105
Structural elements 34 Ultimate limit state 22, 24, 44, 46, 105
Structural safety 99 Ultimate limit state in punching 50
Structural stability 32 Tultimate limit state in shear 44
Supplementary classifications 19 Ultimate limit states 17,23, 130
Supplementary reinforcement 87 Ultimate shear force 44
Support moments 116 Ultimate torque 49
Surface condition 125 Unbraced structures 35
Surface finish 96 Unbraced walls 63, 66
Susceptibility to stress corrosion 125, 137 Units 2
Sway frames 34, 38, 40, 43 Values of accidental actions 20
Sway mode 37 Values of actions 19,20
Sway moments 40 Values of permanent actions 19
T-beams 26,83 Values of the effects of actions 21
T -section 47 Values of variable actions 20
T-sections 48 Variable actions 18,20
Technological properties 14, 125 Vertical reinforcement 86
Technological properties of prestressing steel 134 Vertical spacing 146
Temperature 91 Vibration 18
I Temperature dependent behaviour 137 wall 25
Temporary work inserts 96 Walls 25, 63, 86
.EBCS 2 -1995 159
.
Water 89 "
Web-flange connections 46, 84
Weldability 13, 15 I
Welded fabric 13
Welded mesh reinforcement 97
Welding 97,98
Wires 124, 143
Workability 91
-Workmanship 1, 89, 147
Yield stress 14
"
,;;'~:'"'.~
;.
160 EBCS 2 -1995

Ebcs 2 Structural Use of Concrete PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ebcs 2 Structural Use of Concrete PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ebcs 2 Structural Use of Concrete PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of the Ethiopian Building Code Standard?

What are some of the major topics covered in the document?

-,

You might also like